Easy Altivar ATV610

EAV64387 12/2019

Easy Altivar ATV610

Variable Speed Drives

Programming Manual
12/2019
EAV64387.05

www.schneider-electric.com
 The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical character-
istics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not intended as a
substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user
applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk
analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use
thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for
misuse of the information contained herein. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments
or have found errors in this publication, please notify us.
You agree not to reproduce, other than for your own personal, noncommercial use, all or part of this
document on any medium whatsoever without permission of Schneider Electric, given in writing. You also
agree not to establish any hypertext links to this document or its content. Schneider Electric does not grant
any right or license for the personal and noncommercial use of the document or its content, except for a
non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at your own risk. All other rights are reserved.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this
product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data, only the
manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the relevant instructions must
be followed.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in
injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
© 2019 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

2 EAV64387 12/2019
 Table of Contents

Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Part I Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Initial Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Steps for Setting-Up the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Software Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chapter 2 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Factory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Macro Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Plain Text Display Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Structure of the Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Finding a Parameter in This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Part II Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Chapter 3 [Simply start] SYS- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
[Macro-configuration] CFG- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
[Simply start] SIM- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
[Modified parameters] LMd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Chapter 4 [Display] MOn- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.1 [Motor parameters] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
[Motor parameters] MMO- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2 [Drive parameters] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
[Drive parameters] MPI- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.3 [I/O map] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
[Digital input map] LIA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
[AI1] AI1C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
[AI2] AI2C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
[AI3] AI3C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
[AI4] AI4C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
[AI5] AI5C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
[AQ1] AO1C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
[AQ2] AO2C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
[Digital output map] LOA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.4 Energy parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
[Energy parameters] EnP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.5 [Communication map] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
[Communication map] CMM- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
[Modbus network diag] Mnd-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
[Com. scanner input map] ISA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
[Com scan output map] OSA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
[Modbus HMI Diag] MdH- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
[Command word image] CWI- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
[Freq. ref. word map] rWI- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.6 [Application parameters] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
[Variable Speed Pump]MPP- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
[Booster Control Pump] BCP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

EAV64387 12/2019 3
 Chapter 5 [Diagnostics] dIA- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.1 [Diag. data]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
[Diag. data] ddt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
[Other State] SSt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
[Identification] OId- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.2 [Error history] pFH- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
[Error history] pFH- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.3 [Warnings] ALr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
[Actual warnings] ALrd- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
[Warnings] ALr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Chapter 6 [Complete settings] CSt- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.1 [Motor parameters] MPA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
[Motor parameters] MPA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.2 [Input/Output] IO- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
[Input/Output] IO- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
[DI1 Assignment] Li1C- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
[DI2 Assignment] LI2C- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
[DI3 Assignment] LI3C- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
[DI4 Assignment] LI4C- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
[DI5 Assignment] LI5C- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
[DI6 Assignment] LI6C- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
[DI11 Assignment] dI11- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
[DI12 Assignment] dI12- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
[DI13 Assignment] dI13- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
[DI14 Assignment] dI14- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
[DI15 Assignment] dI15- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
[DI16 Assignment] dI16- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
[Input/Output] IO- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
[AI1 configuration] AI1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
[AI2 configuration] AI2- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
[AI3 configuration] AI3- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
[AI4 configuration] AI4- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
[AI5 configuration] AI5- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
[Virtual AI1] AV1- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
[DQ11 Configuration] dO11- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
[DQ12 Configuration] dO12- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
[R1 configuration] r1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
[R2 configuration] r2- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
[R3 configuration] r3- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
[R4 configuration] r4- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
[R5 configuration] r5- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
[R6 configuration] r6- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
[AQ1 configuration] AO1- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
[AQ2 configuration] AO2- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.3 [Command and Reference] CrP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
[Command and Reference] CrP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.4 [Generic functions] - [Ramp] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
[Ramp] rAMP- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6.5 [Generic functions] - [+/- speed]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
[+/- speed] Upd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.6 [Generic functions] - [Stop configuration] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
[Stop configuration] Stt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.7 [Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
[Auto DC injection] AdC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

4 EAV64387 12/2019
 6.8 [Generic functions] - [Jog] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
[Jog] jOG- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.9 [Generic functions] - [Preset speeds] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
[Preset speeds] PSS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.10 [Generic functions] - [Jump frequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
[Jump frequency] JUF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6.11 [Generic functions] - [Define system units] SUC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
[Define system units] SUC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
6.12 [Generic functions] - [PID controller] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
[PID controller] PId- Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
[PID Feedback] Fdb- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
[PID Reference] rF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
[PID preset references] PrI- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
[PID Reference] rF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
[Settings] St- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
6.13 [Generic functions] - [Sleep/wakeup] SPW- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
[Sleep/Wakeup] SPW- Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
[Sleep menu] SLP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
[AI1 Sensor config.] SIF1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
[AI2 Sensor config.] SIF2- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
[AI3 Sensor config.] SIF3- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
[AI4 Sensor config.] SIF4- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
[AI5 Sensor config.] SIF5- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
[DI5 Sensor Configuration] SIF8- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
[DI6 Sensor Configuration] SIF9- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
[AIV1 Sensor config.] SIV1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
[Sleep menu] SLP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
[Boost] Sbt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
[Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
[Wake up menu] wKP- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
6.14 [Generic functions] - [Threshold reached] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
[Threshold reached] tHrE- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
6.15 [Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
[Mains contactor command] LLC- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
6.16 [Generic functions] - [Parameters switching] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
[Parameters switching] MLP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
[Set 1] PS1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
[Set 2] PS2- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
[Set 3] PS3- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
6.17 [Generic functions] - [Stop after speed timeout] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
[Stop after speed timeout] PrSP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
6.18 [Generic functions] - [Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
[Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
6.19 [Generic functions] - [Booster control] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
[System Architecture] mpq- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
[Pumps configuration] pump- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
[System Architecture] mpq- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
[Booster control] bsC- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
[Stage/Destage condition] sdCm- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
[Booster control] bsC- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
6.20 [Generic monitoring] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
[Stall monitoring] StPr- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
[Therm sensor monit] MtSP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

EAV64387 12/2019 5
 6.21 [Error/Warning handling] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
[Fault reset] rSt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
[Auto fault reset] Atr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
[Catch on the fly] FLr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
[Motor thermal monit] tHt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
[Output phase loss] OPL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
[Input phase loss] IPL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
[External error] EtF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
[Undervoltage handling] USb- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
[Ground Fault] GrFL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
[4-20mA loss] LFL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
[Fallback Speed] LFF- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
[Error detection disable] InH- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
[Fieldbus monitoring] CLL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
[Communication module] COMO- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
[Error/Warning handling] CSWM- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
[Process underload] ULd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
[Process overload] OLd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
[Warn grp 1 definition] A1C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
[Warn grp 2 definition] A2C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
[Warn grp 3 definition] A3C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
[Warn grp 4 definition] A4C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
[Warn grp 5 definition] A5C- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
6.22 [Maintenance]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
[Diagnostics] dAU- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
[Fan management] FAMA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
[Maintenance] CSMA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Chapter 7 [Communication] COM-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
[Modbus Fieldbus] Md1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
[Com. scanner input] ICS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
[Com. scanner output] OCS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
[Profibus] PbC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Chapter 8 [File management] FMt- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
[Transfer config file] tCF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
[Parameter group list] FrY- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
[Firmware update diag] FWUD- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Chapter 9 [My preferences] MYP- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
9.1 [Language] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
[Language] LnG- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
9.2 [Password] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
[Password] COd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
9.3 [Customization] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
[Display screen type] MSC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
9.4 [Access level] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
[Access level] LAC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
9.5 [LCD settings]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
[LCD settings] CnL- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Part III Maintenance and diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Chapter 10 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

6 EAV64387 12/2019
 Chapter 11 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
11.1 Warning Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Warning Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
11.2 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
11.3 FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

EAV64387 12/2019 7
8 EAV64387 12/2019
 Safety Information

Important Information

NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before
trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout
this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel.
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this
material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of
electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the
hazards involved.

Qualification Of Personnel
Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and understand the contents of this manual and
all other pertinent product documentation are authorized to work on and with this product. In addition, these
persons must have received safety training to recognize and avoid hazards involved. These persons must
have sufficient technical training, knowledge and experience and be able to foresee and detect potential
hazards that may be caused by using the product, by changing the settings and by the mechanical,
electrical and electronic equipment of the entire system in which the product is used. All persons working
on and with the product must be fully familiar with all applicable standards, directives, and accident
prevention regulations when performing such work.

EAV64387 12/2019 9
Intended Use
This product is a drive for three-phase asynchronous motors and intended for industrial use according to
this manual.
The product may only be used in compliance with all applicable safety standard and local regulations and
directives, the specified requirements and the technical data. The product must be installed outside the
hazardous ATEX zone. Prior to using the product, you must perform a risk assessment in view of the
planned application. Based on the results, the appropriate safety measures must be implemented. Since
the product is used as a component in an entire system, you must ensure the safety of persons by means
of the design of this entire system (for example, machine design). Any use other than the use explicitly
permitted is prohibited and can result in hazards.

Product Related Information

Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure with this drive.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
 Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and understand the contents of this manual
and all other pertinent product documentation and who have received safety training to recognize and
avoid hazards involved are authorized to work on and with this drive system. Installation, adjustment,
repair and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel.
 The system integrator is responsible for compliance with all local and national electrical code
requirements as well as all other applicable regulations with respect to grounding of all equipment.
 Many components of the product, including the printed circuit boards, operate with mains voltage.
 Only use properly rated, electrically insulated tools and measuring equipment.
 Do not touch unshielded components or terminals with voltage present.
 Motors can generate voltage when the shaft is rotated. Prior to performing any type of work on the
drive system, block the motor shaft to prevent rotation.
 AC voltage can couple voltage to unused conductors in the motor cable. Insulate both ends of unused
conductors of the motor cable.
 Do not short across the DC bus terminals or the DC bus capacitors or the braking resistor terminals.
 Before performing work on the drive system:
 Disconnect all power, including external control power that may be present. Take into account that
the circuit breaker or main switch does not de-energize all circuits.
 Place a Do Not Turn On label on all power switches related to the drive system.
 Lock all power switches in the open position.
 Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge.
 Follow the instructions given in the chapter "Verifying the Absence of Voltage" in the installation
manual of the product.
 Before applying voltage to the drive system:
 Verify that the work has been completed and that the entire installation cannot cause hazards.
 If the mains input terminals and the motor output terminals have been grounded and short-circuited,
remove the ground and the short circuits on the mains input terminals and the motor output
terminals.
 Verify proper grounding of all equipment.
 Verify that all protective equipment such as covers, doors, grids is installed and/or closed.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Damaged products or accessories may cause electric shock or unanticipated equipment operation.

DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK OR UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do not use damaged products or accessories.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Contact your local Schneider Electric sales office if you detect any damage whatsoever.

10 EAV64387 12/2019
 This equipment has been designed to operate outside of any hazardous location. Only install this
equipment in zones known to be free of a hazardous atmosphere.

DANGER
POTENTIAL FOR EXPLOSION
Install and use this equipment in non-hazardous locations only.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Your application consists of a whole range of different interrelated mechanical, electrical, and electronic
components, the drive being just one part of the application. The drive by itself is neither intended to nor
capable of providing the entire functionality to meet all safety-related requirements that apply to your
application. Depending on the application and the corresponding risk assessment to be conducted by you,
a whole variety of additional equipment is required such as, but not limited to, external encoders, external
brakes, external monitoring devices, guards, etc.
As a designer/manufacturer of machines, you must be familiar with and observe all standards that apply
to your machine. You must conduct a risk assessment and determine the appropriate Performance Level
(PL) and/or Safety Integrity Level (SIL) and design and build your machine in compliance with all applicable
standards. In doing so, you must consider the interrelation of all components of the machine. In addition,
you must provide instructions for use that enable the user of your machine to perform any type of work on
and with the machine such as operation and maintenance in a safe manner.
The present document assumes that you are fully aware of all normative standards and requirements that
apply to your application. Since the drive cannot provide all safety-related functionality for your entire
application, you must ensure that the required Performance Level and/or Safety Integrity Level is reached
by installing all necessary additional equipment.

WARNING
INSUFFICIENT PERFORMANCE LEVEL/SAFETY INTEGRITY LEVEL AND/OR UNINTENDED
EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Conduct a risk assessment according to EN ISO 12100 and all other standards that apply to your
application.
 Use redundant components and/or control paths for all critical control functions identified in your risk
assessment.
 If moving loads can result in hazards, for example, slipping or falling loads, operate the drive in closed
loop mode.
 Verify that the service life of all individual components used in your application is sufficient for the
intended service life of your overall application.
 Perform extensive commissioning tests for all potential error situations to verify the effectiveness of
the safety-related functions and monitoring functions implemented, for example, but not limited to,
speed monitoring by means of encoders, short circuit monitoring for all connected equipment, correct
operation of brakes and guards.
 Perform extensive commissioning tests for all potential error situations to verify that the load can be
brought to a safe stop under all conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Drive systems may perform unexpected movements because of incorrect wiring, incorrect settings,
incorrect data or other errors.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Carefully install the wiring in accordance with the EMC requirements.
 Do not operate the product with unknown or unsuitable settings or data.
 Perform a comprehensive commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

EAV64387 12/2019 11
 WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and,
for critical control functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure.
Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop, overtravel stop, power outage and restart.
 Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions.
 System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the
implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of the link.
 Observe all accident prevention regulations and local safety guidelines (1).
 Each implementation of the product must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper operation
before being placed into service.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

(1) For USA: Additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control and to NEMA ICS 7.1 (latest edition),
Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable-Speed
Drive Systems.

The temperature of the products described in this manual may exceed 80 °C (176 °F) during operation.

WARNING
HOT SURFACES
 Ensure that any contact with hot surfaces is avoided.
 Do not allow flammable or heat-sensitive parts in the immediate vicinity of hot surfaces.
 Verify that the product has sufficiently cooled down before handling it.
 Verify that the heat dissipation is sufficient by performing a test run under maximum load conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Machines, controllers, and related equipment are usually integrated into networks. Unauthorized persons
and malware may gain access to the machine as well as to other devices on the network/fieldbus of the
machine and connected networks via insufficiently secure access to software and networks.

WARNING
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO THE MACHINE VIA SOFTWARE AND NETWORKS
 In your hazard and risk analysis, consider all hazards that result from access to and operation on the
network/fieldbus and develop an appropriate cyber security concept.
 Verify that the hardware infrastructure and the software infrastructure into which the machine is
integrated as well as all organizational measures and rules covering access to this infrastructure
consider the results of the hazard and risk analysis and are implemented according to best practices
and standards covering IT security and cyber security (such as: ISO/IEC 27000 series, Common
Criteria for Information Technology Security Evaluation, ISO/ IEC 15408, IEC 62351, ISA/IEC 62443,
NIST Cybersecurity Framework, Information Security Forum - Standard of Good Practice for
Information Security).
 Verify the effectiveness of your IT security and cyber security systems using appropriate, proven
methods.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Perform a comprehensive commissioning test to verify that communication monitoring properly detects
communication interruptions
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

12 EAV64387 12/2019
 NOTICE
DESTRUCTION DUE TO INCORRECT MAINS VOLTAGE
Before switching on and configuring the product, verify that it is approved for the mains voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

EAV64387 12/2019 13
14 EAV64387 12/2019
 About the Book

At a Glance

Document Scope
The purpose of this document is to:
 help you to set up the drive,
 show you how to program the drive,
 show you the different menus, modes, and parameters,
 help you in maintenance and diagnostics.

Validity Note
NOTE: The products listed in the document are not all available at the time of publication of this document
online. The data, illustrations and product specifications listed in the guide will be completed and updated
as the product availabilities evolve. Updates to the guide will be available for download once products are
released on the market.
Original instructions and information given in this manual have been written in English (before optional
translation).
This documentation is valid for the Altivar 610 drives.
The technical characteristics of the devices described in the present document also appear online. To
access the information online:

Step Action
1 Go to the Schneider Electric home page www.schneider-electric.com.
2 In the Search box type the reference of a product or the name of a product range.
 Do not include blank spaces in the reference or product range.
 To get information on grouping similar modules, use asterisks (*).

3 If you entered a reference, go to the Product Datasheets search results and click on the reference that
interests you.
If you entered the name of a product range, go to the Product Ranges search results and click on the
product range that interests you.
4 If more than one reference appears in the Products search results, click on the reference that interests
you.
5 Depending on the size of your screen, you may need to scroll down to see the datasheet.
6 To save or print a datasheet as a .pdf file, click Download XXX product datasheet.

The characteristics that are described in the present document should be the same as those character-
istics that appear online. In line with our policy of constant improvement, we may revise content over time
to improve clarity and accuracy. If you see a difference between the document and online information, use
the online information as your reference.

EAV64387 12/2019 15
Related Documents
Use your tablet or your PC to quickly access detailed and comprehensive information on all our products
on www.schneider-electric.com.
The internet site provides the information you need for products and solutions:
 The whole catalog for detailed characteristics and selection guides,
 The CAD files to help design your installation, available in over 20 different file formats,
 All software and firmware to maintain your installation up to date,
 A large quantity of White Papers, Environment documents, Application solutions, Specifications... to
gain a better understanding of our electrical systems and equipment or automation,
 And finally all the User Guides related to your drive, listed below:

(Other option manuals and Instruction sheets are available on www.schneider-electric.com)

Title of Documentation Catalog Number

Digital Catalog for Industrial Automation Digit-Cat
Altivar Easy 610 Catalog DIA2ED2140702EN (English)
ATV610 Getting Started EAV64374 (English), EAV64379 (Chinese)
ATV610 Installation Manual EAV64381 (English), EAV64386 (Chinese)
ATV610 Programming Manual EAV64387 (English)
EAV64393 (Chinese)
ATV610 Communication Parameters File EAV64394 (English)
ATV610 Modbus Manual EAV64395 (English
ATV610 PROFIBUS DP manual EAV64396 (English)

You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at
www.schneider-electric.com/en/download

Terminology
The technical terms, terminology, and the corresponding descriptions in this manual normally use the
terms or definitions in the relevant standards.
In the area of drive systems this includes, but is not limited to, terms such as error, error message, failure,
fault, fault reset, protection, safe state, safety function, warning, warning message, and so on.
Among others, these standards include:
 IEC 61800 series: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems
 IEC 61508 Ed.2 series: Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related
 EN 954-1 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems
 EN ISO 13849-1 & 2 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems.
 IEC 61158 series: Industrial communication networks - Fieldbus specifications
 IEC 61784 series: Industrial communication networks - Profiles
 IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines – Part 1: General requirements

In addition, the term zone of operation is used in conjunction with the description of specific hazards, and
is defined as it is for a hazard zone or danger zone in the EC Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC) and in ISO
12100-1.
Also see the glossary at the end of this manual.

16 EAV64387 12/2019
 Easy Altivar ATV610
Introduction
EAV64387 12/2019

Part I
Introduction

Introduction

What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
1 Setup 19
2 Overview 25

EAV64387 12/2019 17
Introduction

18 EAV64387 12/2019
 Easy Altivar ATV610
Setup
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 1
Setup

Setup

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Initial Steps 20
Steps for Setting-Up the Drive 22
Software Enhancements 23

EAV64387 12/2019 19
Setup

Initial Steps

Before Powering up the Drive

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Before switching on the device, verify that no unintended signals can be applied to the digital inputs that
could cause unintended movements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

If the drive was not connected to mains for an extended period of time, the capacitors must be restored to
their full performance before the motor is started.

NOTICE
REDUCED CAPACITOR PERFORMANCE
 Apply mains voltage to the drive for one hour before starting the motor if the drive has not been
connected to mains for the following periods of time:
 12 months at a maximum storage temperature of +50°C (+122°F)
 24 months at a maximum storage temperature of +45°C (+113°F)
 36 months at a maximum storage temperature of +40°C (+104°F)

 Verify that no Run command can be applied before the period of one hour has elapsed.
 Verify the date of manufacture if the drive is commissioned for the first time and run the specified
procedure if the date of manufacture is more than 12 months in the past.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

If the specified procedure cannot be performed without a Run command because of internal mains
contactor control, perform this procedure with the power stage enabled, but the motor being at standstill
so that there is no appreciable mains current in the capacitors.

Mains Contactor

NOTICE
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Do not switch on the drive at intervals of less than 60 s.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

20 EAV64387 12/2019
 Setup

Using a Motor with a Lower Rating or Dispensing with a Motor Altogether

In factory settings, the motor output phase loss detection is active: [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL is set to
[OPF Error Triggered] YES. For details, refer to the parameter description (see page 258). For
commissioning tests or maintenance phase, the drive could be connected to a small motor power size and
thus trigger an error [Output Phase Loss] OPF2 or [Single output phase loss] OPF1 when a Run
command is applied.For that purpose, the function can be disabled by setting [OutPhaseLossAssign]
OPL to [Function Inactive] nO.
Set also [Motor control type] Ctt to [U/F VC Standard] Std in [Motor parameters] MPA-. For details,
refer to the parameter description (see page 92).

NOTICE
MOTOR OVERHEATING
Install external thermal monitoring equipment under the following conditions:
 If a motor with a nominal current of less than 20% of the nominal current of the drive is connected.
 If you use the function Motor Switching.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If output phase monitoring is disabled, phase loss and, by implication, accidental disconnection of cables,
are not detected.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

EAV64387 12/2019 21
Setup

Steps for Setting-Up the Drive

Drive systems may perform unexpected movements because of incorrect wiring, incorrect settings,
incorrect data or other errors.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Carefully install the wiring in accordance with the EMC requirements.
 Do not operate the product with unknown or unsuitable settings or data.
 Perform a comprehensive commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Tips
Use the [Config. Source] FCSI parameter (see page 286) to restore the factory settings at any time.
NOTE: The following operations must be performed for optimum drive performance in terms of accuracy
and response time:
 Enter the values indicated on the motor nameplate in the [Motor parameters] MPA- menu.
 Perform autotuning with the motor cold and connected using the [Autotuning] tUn parameter.

22 EAV64387 12/2019
 Setup

Software Enhancements

Overview
Since the ATV610 was first launched, it has benefited from the addition of several new functions.
The software version has been updated to V1.6. Although this documentation relates to version V1.6, it
can still be used with earlier versions.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.6. in Comparison to V1.5

Fallback speed response on some error detection is now possible. Refer to the [Fallback Speed] LFF-
menu.
New parameters to display the motor run time and the power-on time in 0.1 hours. Refer to the parameters
[Motor Run Time] rtHH and [Power-on Time] PtHH.
PID monitoring parameters can be selected to be displayed on the default screen. Refer to the [Display
screen type] MSC- menu.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.5 in Comparison to V1.4

The setting range of [Nom Motor Current] NCR and [Motor Th Current] ITH has been updated.
New menu to display the energy consumption.
[Overmodul. Activation] OVMA parameter has been added in the [Maintenance] CSMA- menu.
[Fan mode] FFM is forced to [Never] STP on ATV610U07N4 frame size 0.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.4 in Comparison to V1.3

In the [My preferences] MYP- menu, the [Password] COd- submenu has been added. It allows you to
protect the configuration access via a password.
New settings in the [LCD settings] CnL- menu.
New parameter to configure a delay for the function Sleep Wakeup.
New parameter for the ground fault detection. Refer to the [Ground Fault] GrFL- menu.
New menu to customize the default screen. Refer to the [Display screen type] MSC- menu.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.3 in Comparison to V1.2

In the [My preferences] MYP menu, the [LCD settings] CnL- menu has been added.
The default value of several parameters, such a [Motor control type] Ctt, [R3 assignment] R3 or [DI1
Delay] L1D to [D16 Delay] L16D, has been modified.
The relay R1 can now be asssigned for multipump feature.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.2 in Comparison to V1.1

Improvements of the Sleep Wakeup function.
In the [Display] MON- menu, the [Application parameters] APR- menu has been added.
New functions are available. Refer to the [Complete Settings] CST- menu.

EAV64387 12/2019 23
Setup

24 EAV64387 12/2019
 Easy Altivar ATV610
Overview
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 2
Overview

Overview

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Factory Configuration 26
Macro Configuration 27
Basic Functions 29
Plain Text Display Terminal 30
Structure of the Parameter Table 32
Finding a Parameter in This Document 33

EAV64387 12/2019 25
Overview

Factory Configuration

Factory Settings
The drive is factory-set for common operating conditions:
 Display: drive ready [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FRH when motor is ready to run and motor frequency when
motor is running.
 The DI3 and DI5 to DI6 digital inputs, AI2 and AI3 analog inputs, R2 and R3 relays are unassigned.
 Stop mode when error detected: freewheel.

This table presents the basic parameters of the drive and their factory setting values:

Code Name Factory setting values

bFr [Motor Standard] [50Hz IEC] 50
rIn [Reverse Disable] [Yes] yes
tCC [2/3-Wire Control] [2-Wire Control] 2C: 2-wire control
Ctt [Motor control type] [U/F VC Quad.] UFq: U/F for quadratics loads
ACC [Acceleration] 30.0 s
dEC [Deceleration] 30.0 s
LSP [Low Speed] 0.0 Hz
HSP [High Speed] 50.0 Hz
ItH [Motor Th Current] Nominal motor current (value depending on drive rating)
Frd [Forward] [DI1] dI1: Digital input DI1
Fr1 [Ref Freq 1 Config] [AI1] AI1: Analog input AI1
r1 [R1 Assignment] [Operating State Fault] FLt: the contact opens when the
drive has detected error or when the drive has been switched
off
brA [Dec.Ramp Adapt] [Yes] YES: function active (automatic adaptation of
deceleration ramp)
Atr [Auto Fault Reset] [No] nO: function inactive
Stt [Type of stop] [On Ramp] rMP: on ramp
AO1 [AQ1 assignment] [Motor Frequency] Ofr: Motor frequency
AO2 [AQ2 assignment] [Motor Current] OCr: Motor current

NOTE: If you want to restore the drive presettings to their factory values, set [Config. Source] FCSi to
[Macro Config] Ini.
Verify whether the above values are compatible with the application and modify them if required.

26 EAV64387 12/2019
 Overview

Macro Configuration

Introduction
The drive offers quick programming using macro configurations that correspond to different applications or
uses:
 Start/Stop
 Automatic/Manual control
 PID controller usage
 Preset speeds
 Connection to Modbus fieldbus
 Multi Pump control

Each of these configurations is still configurable.

Macro Configuration Presets

[Start/Stop] [Auto/Manual] [PID Controller] [Preset [Modbus] [Multi-pump 1] [Multi-pump 2]

bStS bAMM bPId speeds] bMbC bMP1 bMP2
(Factory bPSP
setting)
[R1 [Operating [Operating State [Operating State [Operating [Operating [Operating [Operating
Assignment] State Fault] Fault] FLt Fault] FLt State Fault] State Fault] State Fault] State Fault]
r1 FLt FLt FLt FLt FLt
[R2 [Drive Running] [Drive Running] [Drive Running] [Drive [Drive Running] [Pump 2 Cmd] [[Pump 1 Cmd]]
Assignment] rUn rUn rUn Running] rUn MPO2 MPO1
r2 rUn
[R3 [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Pump 3 Cmd] [[Pump 2 Cmd]]
Assignment] nO nO nO nO nO MPO3 MPO2
r3
[AQ1 [Motor [Motor [Motor [Motor [Motor [Motor [Motor
assignment] Frequency] Frequency] Frequency] Frequency] Frequency] Frequency] Frequency]
AO1 OFr OFr OFr OFr OFr OFr OFr
[AQ1 Type] [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A
AO1T
[AQ1 min 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA
output]
AOL1
[AQ1 max 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
output]
AOH1
[AQ2 [Motor Current] [Motor Current] [Motor Current] [Motor [Motor Current] [Motor Current] [Motor Current]
assignment] OCr OCr OCr Current] OCr OCr OCr OCr
AO2
[AQ2 Type] [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A
AO2T
[AQ2 min 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA
output]
AOL2
[AQ2 max 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
output]
AOH2
[AI1 Type] [Voltage] 10u [Voltage] 10u [Voltage] 10u [Voltage] [Voltage] 10u [Voltage] 10u [Voltage] 10u
AI1T 10u
[AI1 min value] 0 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V
UIL1
[AI1 max 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V
value] UIH1
[AI2 Type] [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A
AI2T
[AI2 min. 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA
value] CRL2

EAV64387 12/2019 27
Overview

[Start/Stop] [Auto/Manual] [PID Controller] [Preset [Modbus] [Multi-pump 1] [Multi-pump 2]

bStS bAMM bPId speeds] bMbC bMP1 bMP2
(Factory bPSP
setting)
[AI2 max. 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
value] CRH2
[Control Mode] [Not separ.] [Not separ.] [Not separ.] [Not separ.] [Separate] [Not separ.] [Not separ.]
CHCF SIM SIM SIM SIM SEP SIM SIM
[Command [Cmd Channel [Cmd Channel 1] [Cmd Channel [Cmd Channel [Cmd Channel [Cmd Channel [Cmd Channel
Switching] 1] CD1 CD1 1] CD1 1] CD1 1] CD1 1] CD1 1] CD1
CCS
[Cmd channel [Terminals] [Terminals] TEr [Terminals] [Terminals] [Terminals] [Terminals] [Terminals]
1] CD1 TEr TEr TEr TEr TEr TEr

[Cmd channel [Modbus] Mdb [Modbus] Mdb [Modbus] Mdb [Modbus] [Modbus] Mdb [Modbus] Mdb [Modbus] Mdb
2] CD2 Mdb

[Freq Switch [Ref Freq [DI4 [Ref Freq [Ref Freq [DI3 [Ref Freq [Ref Freq
Assign] RFC Channel 1] Configuration] Channel 1] Channel 1] Configuration] Channel 1] Channel 1]
Fr1 DI4 Fr1 Fr1 DI3 Fr1 Fr1
[Ref Freq 1 [AI1] AI1 [AI1] AI1 [AI1] AI1 [AI1] AI1 [Modbus] Mdb [AI1] AI1 [AI1] AI1
Config] FR1
[Ref Freq 2 [Not [AI2] AI2 [Not Configured] [Not [AI1] AI1 [Not [Not
Config] FR2 Configured] No Configured] Configured] Configured]
No No No No
[2/3-Wire [2-Wire Control] [2-Wire Control] [2-Wire Control] [2-Wire [2-Wire Control] [2-Wire Control] [2-Wire Control]
Control] TCC 2C 2C 2C Control] 2C 2C 2C 2C

[Reverse [Not Assigned] [DI2 [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned]
Assign] RRS No Configuration] No No No No No
DI2
[Fault Reset [DI2 [No] No [No] No [DI2 [DI2 [No] No [No] No
Assign] RSF Configuration] Configuration] Configuration]
DI2 DI2 DI2
[PID feedback] [No] No [No] No [AI2] AI2 [No] No [No] No [AI2] AI2 [AI2] AI2
PIF
[2 Preset Freq] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [DI3 [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned]
PS2 No No No Configuration] No No No
DI3
[4 Preset Freq] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [DI4 [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned]
PS4 No No No Configuration] No No No
DI4
[Preset speed 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
2] SP2
[Preset speed 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
3] SP3
[Preset speed 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
4] SP4

28 EAV64387 12/2019
 Overview

Basic Functions

Drive Ventilation
If [Fan mode] FFM is set to:
 [Standard] Std, the operation of the fan is enabled when the motor is running. According to drive
rating, this could be the only available setting.
 [Always] rUn, the fan is always activated.
 [Economy] ECo, the fan is activated only if necessary, according to the internal thermal state of the
drive.
NOTE: This parameter is forced to [Never] STP on ATV610U07N4 frame size 0.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the ambient temperature does not exceed 40 °C (104° F) if the fan is disabled.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Fan speed and [Fan Operation Time] FPbt are monitored values:
 An abnormal low speed of the fan triggers a warning [Fan Feedback Warning] FFdA.
 As soon as [Fan Operation Time] FPbt reach the predefined value of 45,000 hours, a warning [Fan
Counter Warning] FCtA is triggered.
[Fan Operation Time] FPbt counter can be set to 0 by using the [Time Counter Reset] rPr parameter.

EAV64387 12/2019 29
Overview

Plain Text Display Terminal

Description of the Plain Text Display Terminal

This Plain Text Display Terminal is a local control unit which can be either plugged on the drive or mounted
on the door of the wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure. It has a cable with connectors, which is
connected to the drive front Modbus serial link.

1 STOP / RESET: Stop command / apply a Fault Reset.

2 ESC: used to quit a menu/parameter or remove the currently displayed value in order to revert to the previous value
retained in the memory
3 Graphic display.
4 Home: access directly the home page.
5 RUN: executes the function assuming it has been configured.
6 Touch wheel / OK: used to save the current value or access the selected menu/parameter. The touch wheel is used
to scroll fast into the menus. Up/down arrows are used for precise selections, right/left arrows are used to select
digits when setting a numerical value of a parameter.

NOTE: Keys 1, 5 and 6 can be used to control the drive, if control via the Plain Text Display Terminal is
activated. To activate the keys on the Plain Text Display Terminal, you first need to set [Config Ref Freq
1] Fr1 to [Ref.Frequency via Rmt.Term] LCC.

Description of the Graphic Display

Key
1 Display line: its content can be configured
2 Drive state
3 Active control channel
 TERM: terminals
 HMI: Plain Text Display Terminal
 MDB: integrated Modbus serial
 NET: fieldbus module

4 Customer defined
5 Menu line: indicates the name of the current menu or submenu
6 Menus, submenus, parameters, values, bar charts, and so on, are displayed in drop-down window format
on a maximum of 2 lines. The line or value selected by the navigation button is displayed in reverse video

30 EAV64387 12/2019
 Overview

Description of the Product Front LEDs

Key LED color LED status Drive status

1 Green Blinking Ready
Flickering Acceleration or deceleration
On Running
2 Red Blinking Warning
On Operating state fault
3 Yellow Blinking Modbus communication active
4 Green On Fieldbus module: communication active
5 Red On Fieldbus module: communication detected error
Blinking Fieldbus module: incorrect settings

EAV64387 12/2019 31
Overview

Structure of the Parameter Table

General Legend

Pictogram Description
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu.
When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for
the corresponding function, their description is detailed in these menus, on the pages indicated,
to aid programming.
Setting of this parameter can be done during operation or when stopped.
NOTE: It is advisable to stop the motor before modifying any of the settings.
To modify the assignment of the parameter, reinforced validation is required.

Parameter Presentation
Below is an example of a parameter presentation:

32 EAV64387 12/2019
 Overview

Finding a Parameter in This Document

With the Manual

It is possible to use either the parameter name or the parameter code to search in the manual the page
giving details of the selected parameter.

Difference Between Menu and Parameter

A dash after menu and submenu codes is used to differentiate menu commands from parameter codes.
Example:

Level Name Code

Menu [Ramp] rAMP-
Parameter [Acceleration] ACC

EAV64387 12/2019 33
Overview

34 EAV64387 12/2019
 Easy Altivar ATV610
Programming
EAV64387 12/2019

Part II
Programming

Programming

What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
3 [Simply start] SYS- 37
4 [Display] MOn- 43
5 [Diagnostics] dIA- 79
6 [Complete settings] CSt- 89
7 [Communication] COM- 279
8 [File management] FMt- 285
9 [My preferences] MYP- 291

EAV64387 12/2019 35
Programming

36 EAV64387 12/2019
 Easy Altivar ATV610
Simply start SYS-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 3
[Simply start] SYS-

[Simply start] SYS-

Introduction

[Simply start] SYS- menu contains 3 tabs for quick access to mains features:
 Macro Configuration tab
 Simply Start tab which gives a quick access to basic parameters to set.
 Modified Parameters tab which gives a quick access to the 10 last modified parameters.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Macro-configuration] CFG- Menu 38
[Simply start] SIM- Menu 39
[Modified parameters] LMd- Menu 42

EAV64387 12/2019 37
Simply start SYS-

[Macro-configuration] CFG- Menu

Access
[Simply start] [Macro-configuration]

About This Menu

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

[Macro Config] CFG

Macro configuration.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Start/Stop] bStS Start / Stop
Factory setting
[Auto/Manual] bAMM Auto / Manual
[PID Controller] bPId PID controller
[Preset speeds] bPSP Preset speeds
[Modbus] bMbC Modbus
[Multi-pump 1] BMP1 Multi- pump 1
[Multi-pump 2] BMP2 Multi- pump 2

For more information, refer to the macro configuration presets table (see page 27).

38 EAV64387 12/2019
 Simply start SYS-

[Simply start] SIM- Menu

Access
[Simply start] [Simply start]

About This Menu

This menu provides a quick access to the basic parameters to set.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Fully read and understand the manual of the connected motor.
 Verify that all motor parameters are correctly set by referring to the nameplate and the manual of the
connected motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

[Nominal motor power] nPr

Nominal motor power.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Motor param choice] MPC is set to [Mot Power] nPr.

Rated motor power given on the nameplate, in kW if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [50Hz IEC] 50, in
HP if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60Hz NEMA] 60.

Setting Description
According to drive rating –
Factory setting: according to the drive rating

[Nom Motor Current] ncr

The rated motor current is given on the motor nameplate.

Setting Description

0.25...1.5 In(1) Setting range

Factory setting: According to drive rating and [Motor Standard] bFr.
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Motor Th Current] ItH

Motor thermal monitoring current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate.

Setting Description

0.2...1.1 (1) Setting range

Factory setting: According to drive rating
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Acceleration] ACC
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS. To have a repeatability in the ramps, the
value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.

Setting Description
0.0...6,000.0 s (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 30.0 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] Inr.

EAV64387 12/2019 39
Simply start SYS-

[Deceleration] dEC
Time to decelerate from the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS to 0. To have a repeatability in the ramps, the
value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.

Setting Description
0.0...6,000.0 s (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 30.0 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] Inr.

[Low Speed] LSP

Low speed.
Motor frequency at minimum reference, can be set between 0 and [High Speed] HSP.

Setting Description

0.0... [High Speed] HSP Hz Setting range

Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[High Speed] HSP

High speed.
Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low Speed] LSP and [Max Frequency]
tFr. The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60Hz NEMA] 60.
It is recommended to have [Max Frequency] TFR equal to or higher than 110% of [High Speed] HSP.

Setting Description

0.0...[Max Frequency] TFR Hz Setting range

Factory setting: 50.0 Hz

[Output Ph Rotation] PHr

The modification of this parameter has the same consequence as an inversion of two phases of the motor
wiring. It allows you to follow color standards for wiring or to adapt the rotation of the motor to the intended
forward direction without any electrical wiring modification.

Setting Code / Value Description

[ABC] AbC Standard rotation
Factory Setting
[ACB] ACb Opposite rotation

[Config Ref Freq 1] Fr1

Configuration reference frequency 1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
[AI1] AI1 Analog input AI1
Factory Setting
[AI2]...[AI3] AI2...AI3 Analog input AI2...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref Frequency via LCC Display terminal source
Rmt. Term]
[Ref Frequency via Mdb Modbus source
Modbus]
[Ref Frequency via nEt Fieldbus module source
Com. Module]

40 EAV64387 12/2019
 Simply start SYS-

Setting Code / Value Description

[PulseInput PI5...PI6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment On
DI5]...[PulseInput
Assignment On
DI6]

[OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL

Output phase loss assignment.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If output phase monitoring is disabled, phase loss and, by implication, accidental disconnection of cables,
are not detected.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Function Inactive] nO Function inactive
[OPF Error YES Tripping on [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL with freewheel stop
Triggered] Factory setting
[No Error OAC No detected error triggered, but management of the output voltage in order
Triggered] to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established and
catch on the fly performed (even if this function has not been
configured).The drive switches to [Output cut ]SOC state after [OutPhL
Time] Odt time. Catch on fly is possible as soon as the drive is in stand
by output cut [Output cut] SOC state.

EAV64387 12/2019 41
Simply start SYS-

[2/3-wire control] tCC

2-wire or 3-wire control.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If this parameter is changed, the parameters [Reverse Assign] rrS and [2-wire type] tCt and the
assignments of the digital inputs are reset to the factory setting.
Verify that this change is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[2-Wire Control] 2C 2-wire control (level commands): This is the input state (0 or 1) or edge (0
to 1 or 1 to 0), which controls running or stopping.
Example of source wiring:

DI1 Forward
DIx Reverse

Factory setting
[3-Wire Control] 3C 3-wire control (pulse commands) [3 wire]: A forward or reverse pulse is
sufficient to command starting, a stop pulse is sufficient to command
stopping.
Example of source wiring:

DI1 Stop
DI2 Forward
DIx Reverse

[Dual rating] drt

Dual rating state

Settings Code / Value Description

[Normal Duty] nOrMAL Normal duty
[Heavy Duty] HIGH High duty

[Modified parameters] LMd- Menu

Access
[Simply start] [Modified parameters]

About This Menu

This menu gives a quick access to the 10 last modified parameters.

42 EAV64387 12/2019
 Easy Altivar ATV610
Display MOn-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 4
[Display] MOn-

[Display] MOn-

Introduction

[Display] MOn- menu shows monitoring data related to the drive and the application.
It offers an application-oriented display in terms of energy, cost, cycle, efficiency, ...
This is available with customized units and graphics view.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
4.1 [Motor parameters] 44
4.2 [Drive parameters] 46
4.3 [I/O map] 49
4.4 Energy parameters 63
4.5 [Communication map] 64
4.6 [Application parameters] 73

EAV64387 12/2019 43
Display MOn-

Section 4.1
[Motor parameters]

[Motor parameters]

[Motor parameters] MMO- Menu

Access
[Display] [Motor parameters]

About This Menu

This menu shows the motor-related parameters.

[Motor Speed] Spd

Motor speed.
This parameter displays the estimated rotor speed without motor slip.

Setting Description
0...65,535 rpm Setting range
Factory setting:–

[Motor Voltage] UOP

Motor voltage.

Setting Description
0...65,535 V Setting range
Factory setting:–

[Motor Power] OPr

Motor power.
Output power in % (100% = nominal motor mechanical power).

Setting Description
-300...300% Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Motor Torque] Otr

Motor torque.
Output torque value (100% = Nominal value of motor torque).
NOTE: The displayed value is always positive in motor mode and negative in generator mode whatever
the direction.

Setting Description
-300.0... 300.0% Setting range
Factory setting: –

44 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[Motor Current] LCr

Motor current.

Setting Description
0.00...65,535 A Setting range according to drive ratings
Factory setting: –

[Motor Therm state] tHr

Motor thermal state.
The normal motor thermal state is 100%, the [Motor Overload] OLF threshold is set to 118%.

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: –

EAV64387 12/2019 45
Display MOn-

Section 4.2
[Drive parameters]

[Drive parameters]

[Drive parameters] MPI- Menu

Access
[Display] [Drive parameters]

About This Menu

This menu shows the drive-related parameters.

[Ref Frequency] FrH

Frequency reference before ramp (signed value).
This parameter is read-only. It enables you to display the reference frequency applied to the motor,
regardless of which channel for reference value has been selected.

Setting Description
-500.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Ref Frequency] LFr

Reference frequency.
This parameter only appears if the function has been enabled. It is used to change the reference frequency
from the remote control. OK does not have to be pressed to enable a change of reference.

Setting Description
-500.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Motor Frequency] rFr

Motor frequency.

Setting Description
-3,276.8...3,276.7 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Mains Voltage] ULn

Mains voltage.
Line voltage based on DC bus measurement, motor running or stopped.

Setting Description
1.0...860.0 V Setting range: [No meas.] ULNUNK is displayed if no value is measured.
Factory setting: _

[DC Bus Voltage] VBUS

DC bus voltage.

Setting Description
0...65,535 V Setting range: [No meas.] ULNUNK is displayed if no value is measured.
Factory setting: _

46 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[Drive Therm State] tHd

Drive thermal state.
The normal drive thermal state is 100%, the [Drive Overheating] OHF threshold is set to 118%

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Used Param. Set] CFpS

Used parameter set.
Configuration parameter status (can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled).

Setting Code / Value Description

[None] nO Not assigned
[Set N°1] CFP1 Parameter set 1 active
[Set N°2] CFP2 Parameter set 2 active
[Set N°3] CFP3 Parameter set 3 active

[Motor Run Time] rtHH

Motor run time.
Run elapsed time display (resettable) in 0.1 hours (length of time the motor has been switched on).

Setting Description
0.0...429,496,729.5 h Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Power-on Time] PtHH

Power-on time (resettable)
This counter can be set to 0 by using the [Time Counter Reset ]rPr parameter.

Setting Description
0.0...429,496,729.5 h Setting range
Factory setting: _

[IGBT Warning Counter] tAC

IGBT Warning counter.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr

Setting Description
0...65,535 s Setting range
Factory setting: _

[PID Reference] rPC

PID reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] no.

Setting Description
0...65,535% Setting range
Factory setting: –

EAV64387 12/2019 47
Display MOn-

[PID feedback] rPF

PID feedback value.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] no

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[PID Error] rPE

PID error value.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] no

Setting Description
-32,768...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: _

[PID Output] rPO

PID output value.
Output value with limitation.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] no

Setting Description
-3,276.8...3,276.7 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: _

48 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

Section 4.3
[I/O map]

[I/O map]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Digital input map] LIA- Menu 50
[AI1] AI1C- Menu 51
[AI2] AI2C- Menu 53
[AI3] AI3C- Menu 54
[AI4] AI4C- Menu 55
[AI5] AI5C- Menu 56
[AQ1] AO1C- Menu 57
[AQ2] AO2C- Menu 61
[Digital output map] LOA- Menu 62

EAV64387 12/2019 49
Display MOn-

[Digital input map] LIA- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Digital input map]

About This Menu

This menu presents the state and assignment of digital inputs.
Read-only parameters, cannot be configured.
It is used to visualize the state of the digital inputs.
It displays all the functions that are assigned to the digital input in order to verify for multiple assignments.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed. Use the touch wheel to scroll through the
functions.

50 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[AI1] AI1C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog inputs image] [AI1]

About This Menu

This menu presents the characteristics of the analog input.

[AI1] AI1C
Physical value AI1.
AI1 customer image: value of analog input 1.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: _

NOTE: The parameters [AI1 Assignment] AI1A, [AI1 min value] UIL1, [AI1 max value] UIH1 and
[AI1 filter] AI1F can be accessed on the Plain Text Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the [AI1]
AI1C parameter.

[AI1 Assignment] AI1A

Analog input AI1 functions assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with input AI1 in order
to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
[Ref Freq Channel Fr1 Reference frequency channel 1
1] Factory Setting
[Ref Freq Channel Fr2 Reference frequency channel 2
2]
[PID Feedback] PIF PI controller feedback
[Manual PID Ref.] PIM Manual speed reference of the PID controller (auto-man)
[PID Ref FPI PID reference frequency
Frequency]
[Forced local] FLOC Forced local reference source1
[Inst Flow Assign] FS1A Installation flow sensor

[AI1 min value] UIL1

AI1 minimum value.
AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

EAV64387 12/2019 51
Display MOn-

[AI1 max value] UIH1

AI1 maximum value.
AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

[AI1 min. value] CrL1

AI1 minimum value.
AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AI1 max. value] CrH1

AI1 maximum value.
AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

[AI1 filter] AI1F

Interference filtering cutoff time of the low-filter.

Setting Description
0.00...10.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 s

52 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[AI2] AI2C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog inputs image] [AI2]

About This Menu

This menu presents the characteristics of the analog input.

[AI2] AI2C
Physical value AI2.
AI2 customer image: value of analog input 2.
Identical to [AI1] AI1C (see page 51).

[AI2 Assignment] AI2A

Analog input AI2 functions assignment. If no function has been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 51).

[AI2 min value] UIL2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 51).

[AI2 max value] UIH2

AI2 maximum value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 52).

[AI2 min. value] CrL2

AI2 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 type] AI2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 52) with factory setting 4.0 mA.

[AI2 max. value] CrH2

AI2 maximum value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 type] AI2t is set to [Current] 0A.
AI2 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 52).

[AI2 filter] AI2F

Interference filtering.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 52).

EAV64387 12/2019 53
Display MOn-

[AI3] AI3C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog inputs image] [AI3]

About This Menu

This menu presents the characteristics of the analog input.

[AI3] AI3C
Physical value AI3.
AI3 customer image: value of analog input 3.
Identical to [AI1] AI1C (see page 51).

[AI3 Assignment] AI3A

Analog input AI3 functions assignment. If no function has been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 51).

[AI3 min value] UIL3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 51).

[AI3 max value] UIH3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 52).

[AI3 min. value] CrL3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 52).

[AI3 max. value] CrH3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 52).

[AI3 filter] AI3F

AI3 filter.
Interference filtering.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 52).

54 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[AI4] AI4C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog inputs image] [AI4]

About This Menu

This menu presents the characteristics of the analog input.
It can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[AI4] AI4C
Physical value AI4.
AI4 customer image: value of analog input 4.
Identical to [AI1] AI1C (see page 51).

[AI4 Assignment] AI4A

Analog input AI4 functions assignment. If no function has been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 51).

[AI4 min value] UIL4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 type] AI4t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 51).

[AI4 max value] UIH4

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 type] AI4t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 52).

[AI4 min. value] CrL4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 type] AI4t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 52).

[AI4 max. value] CrH4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 type] AI4t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 52).

[AI4 filter] AI4F

Interference filtering cut-off time of the low-filter.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 type] AI4t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 52).

EAV64387 12/2019 55
Display MOn-

[AI5] AI5C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog inputs image] [AI5]

About This Menu

This menu presents the characteristics of the analog input. It can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension
module has been inserted.

[AI5] AI5C
AI5 customer image: value of analog input 5.
Identical to [AI1] AI1C (see page 51).

[AI5 Assignment] AI5A

AI5 functions assignment. If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 51).

[AI5 min value] UIL5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 type] AI5t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 51).

[AI5 max value] UIH5

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 type] AI5t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 52).

[AI5 min. value] CrL5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 type] AI5t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 52).

[AI5 max. value] CrH5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 type] AI5t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 52).

[AI5 filter] AI5F

Interference filtering cut-off time of the low-filter.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 52).

56 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[AQ1] AO1C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog outputs image] [AQ1]

About This Menu

Analogic output functions.
Following parameters can be accessed on the Plain Text Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the
[AQ1] AO1C parameter.

Minimum and Maximum Output Values

The minimum output value, in volts, corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the
maximum value corresponds to its upper limit. The minimum value may be greater than the maximum
value.

PA Parameter assigned
C / VO Current or voltage output
UL Upper limit
LL Lower limit
1 [Min Output] AOLx or UOLx
2 [Max Output] AOHx or UOHx

EAV64387 12/2019 57
Display MOn-

Scaling of the Assigned Parameter

The scale of the assigned parameter can be adapted in accordance with requirements by modifying the
values of the lower and upper limits with 2 parameters for each analog output.
These parameters are given in %. 100% corresponds to the total variation range of the configured
parameter, so: 100% = upper limit - lower limit.
For example, [Sign. torque] Stq which varies between -3 and +3 times the rated torque, 100%
corresponds to 6 times the rated torque.
 The [Scaling AQx min] ASLx parameter modifies the lower limit: new value = lower limit + (range x
ASLx). The value 0% (factory setting) does not modify the lower limit.
 The [Scaling AQx max] ASHx parameter modifies the upper limit: new value = lower limit + (range x
ASLx). The value 100% (factory setting) does not modify the upper limit.
 [Scaling AQx min] ASLx must always be lower than [Scaling AQx max] ASHx.

UL Upper limit of the assigned parameter

LL Lower limit of the assigned parameter
NS New scale
1 ASHx
2 ASLx

Application Example
The value of the motor current at the AQ1 output is to be transferred with 0...20 mA, range 2 In motor, In
motor being the equivalent of a 0.8 In drive.
 The [Motor Current] OCr parameter varies from 0 to 2 times the rated drive current, or a range of 2.5
times the rated drive current.
 [Scaling AQ1 min] ASL1 must not modify the lower limit, which therefore remains at its factory setting
of 0%.
 [Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1 must modify the upper limit by 0.5x the rated motor torque, or 100 - 100/5
= 80% (new value = lower limit + (range x ASH1).

[AQ1] AO1C
AQ1 customer image: value of analog output 1.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: _

58 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[AQ1 Assignment] AO1

AQ1 assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
[Motor Current] OCr Current in the motor, from 0 to 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the
Installation manual and on the drive nameplate)
[Motor Frequency] OFr Output frequency, from 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
Factory Setting
[Ramp out.] OrP From 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[Motor torq.] trq Motor torque, from 0 to 3 times the rated motor torque
[Sign. torque] Stq Signed motor torque, between –3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ sign corresponds to the motor mode and the – sign to the generator mode
(braking).
[sign ramp] OrS Signed ramp output, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[PID ref.] OPS PID controller reference between [Min PID reference] PIP1 and [Max
PID reference] PIP2
[PID feedbk] OPF PID controller feedback between [Min PID feedback] PIF1 and [Max PID
feedback] PIF2
[PID error] OPE PID controller detected error between –5% and +5% of [Max PID feedback]
PIF2 – [Min PID feedback] PIF1
[PID output] OPI PID controller output between [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP
[Motor power] OPr Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Nominal Motor Power] nPr
[Mot thermal] tHr Motor thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Drv thermal] tHd Drive thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Sig. o/p frq.] OFS Signed output frequency, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[Motor volt.] UOP Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS
[Inlet Pressure PS1u Inlet pressure value
Value]
[Outlet Pressure PS2u Outlet pressure value
Value]
[Installation Flow] FS1u Installation flow value

[AQ1 min Output] UOL1

AQ1 minimum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AQ1 max Output] UOH1

AQ1 maximum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

EAV64387 12/2019 59
Display MOn-

[AQ1 min output] AOL1

AQ1 minimum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 4.0 mA

[AQ1 Max Output] AOH1

AQ1 maximum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

[Scaling AQ1 min] ASL1

Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

Setting Description
0.0...100.0% Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0%

[Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1

Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

Setting Description
0.0...100.0% Setting range
Factory setting: 100.0%

[AQ1 Filter] AO1F

Interference filtering.

Setting Description
0.00...10.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 s

60 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[AQ2] AO2C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog outputs image] [AQ2]

About This Menu

Analog output functions.
Following parameters are visible on the Plain Text Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the [AQ2]
AO2C parameter.

[AQ2] AO2C
AQ2 customer image: value of analog output 2.
Identical to [AQ1] AO1C (see page 58).

[AQ2 assignment] AO2

AQ2 assignment.
Identical to [AQ1 Assignment] AO1 (see page 59).

[AQ2 min Output] UOL2

AQ2 minimum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 min Output] UOL1 (see page 59).

[AQ2 max Output] UOH2

AQ2 maximum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 max Output] UOH1 (see page 59).

[AQ2 min output] AOL2

AQ2 minimum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 min Output] AOL1 (see page 60).

[AQ2 max output] AOH2

AQ2 maximum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 max Output] AOH1 (see page 60).

[Scaling AQ2 min] ASL2

Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.
Identical to [Scaling AQ1 Min] ASL1 (see page 60).

[Scaling AQ2 max] ASH2

Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.
Identical to [Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1 (see page 60).

[AQ2 Filter] AO2F

Interference filtering.
Identical to [AQ1 Filter] AO1F (see page 60).

EAV64387 12/2019 61
Display MOn-

[Digital output map] LOA- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Digital output map]

About This Menu

This menu presents the state and assignment of digital outputs.

62 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

Section 4.4
Energy parameters

Energy parameters

[Energy parameters] EnP- Menu

Access
[Display] [Energy parameters]

About This Menu

This menu presents the output mechanical energy data.

[Motor Consumption] ME4

Energy consumption (TWh).
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Consumption(TWh)] ME4 is not set to 0.

Setting Description
0...999 TWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Motor Consumption] ME3

Energy consumption (GWh).

Setting Description
0...999 GWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Motor Consumption] ME2

Energy consumption (MWh).

Setting Description
0...999 MWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Motor Consumption] ME1

Energy consumption (kWh).

Setting Description
0...999 kWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Motor Consumption] ME0

Energy consumption (Wh).

Setting Description
0...999 Wh Setting range
Factory setting: _

EAV64387 12/2019 63
Display MOn-

Section 4.5
[Communication map]

[Communication map]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Communication map] CMM- Menu 65
[Modbus network diag] Mnd-Menu 68
[Com. scanner input map] ISA- Menu 69
[Com scan output map] OSA- Menu 70
[Modbus HMI Diag] MdH- Menu 71
[Command word image] CWI- Menu 72
[Freq. ref. word map] rWI- Menu 72

64 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[Communication map] CMM- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map]

[Command Channel] CMdC

Command channel.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Terminals] tEr Terminal block source
Factory Setting
[Ref.Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC Command via Plain Text Display Terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Command via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Command via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been inserted
Module]

[Cmd Register] CMd

Command register.
[Control Mode] CHCF is not set to [I/O profile] IO
Possible values in CiA402 profile, separate, or not separate mode:

Bit Description, Value

0 Set to 1: "Switch on"/Contactor command
1 Set to 0: "Disable voltage"/Authorization to supply AC power
2 Set to 0: "Quick stop"
3 Set to 1: "Enable operation"/Run command
4 to 6 Reserved (= 0)
7 "Fault reset" acknowledgment active on 0 to 1 rising edge
8 Set to 1: Halt stop according to the [Type Of Stop] Stt parameter without leaving the operation
enabled state
9 and 10 Reserved (= 0)
11 to 15 Can be assigned to commands

Possible values in the I/O profile. On state command [2-Wire Control] 2C:

Bit Description, Value

0 Forward (on state) command:
0: No forward command
1: Forward command
NOTE: The assignment of bit 0 cannot be modified. It corresponds to the assignment of the
terminals. It can be switched. Bit 0 Cd00 is only active if the channel of this control word is
active.
1 to 15 Can be assigned to commands

Possible values in the I/O profile. On edge command [3-Wire Control] 3C:

Bit Description, Value

0 Stop (run authorization):
0: Stop
1: Run is authorized on a forward or reverse command
1 Forward (on 0 to 1 rising edge) command
2 to 15 Can be assigned to commands
NOTE: The assignment of bits 0 and 1 cannot be modified. It corresponds to the assignment of the terminals. It can
be switched. Bits 0 Cd00 and 1 Cd01 are only active if the channel of this control word is active.

EAV64387 12/2019 65
Display MOn-

[Ref Freq Channel] rFCC

Channel of reference frequency.
Identical to [Command Channel] CMdC (see page 65)

[Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH

Frequency reference before ramp (signed value).
This parameter is read-only. It enables to display the reference frequency applied to the motor, regardless
of which channel for reference value has been selected.

Setting Description
Setting range
Factory setting: 0 Hz

[CIA402 State Reg] EtA

CIA402 State Register.
Possible values in CiA402 profile, separate, or not separate mode:

Bit Description, Value

0 "Ready to switch on", awaiting power section line supply
1 "Switched on", ready
2 "Operation enabled", running
3 Operating detected error state:
0: Inactive
1: Active
4 "Voltage enabled", power section line supply present:
0: Power section line supply unavailable
1: Power section line supply present
NOTE: When the drive is powered by the power section only, this bit is always at 1.
5 Quick stop
6 "Switched on disabled", power section line supply locked
7 Warning:
0: No warning
1: Warning
8 Reserved (= 0)
9 Remote: command or reference via the network
0: Command or reference via the Plain Text Display Terminal
1: Command or reference via the network
10 Targets reference reached:
0: The reference is not reached
1: The reference has been reached
NOTE: When the drive is in speed mode, this is the speed reference.
11 "Internal limit active", reference outside limits:
0: The reference is within the limits
1: The reference is not within the limits
NOTE: When the drive is in speed mode, the limits are defined by the [Low speed] LSP and
[High speed] HSP parameters.
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 "Stop key", STOP via stop key:
0: STOP key not pressed
1: Stop triggered by the STOP key on the Plain Text Display Terminal
15 "Direction", direction of rotation:
0: Forward rotation at output
1: Reverse rotation at output
NOTE: The combination of bits 0, 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6 defines the state in the DSP 402 state chart (see the communication
manuals).

66 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

Possible values in the I/O profile:

Bit Description, Value

0 Reserved (= 0 or 1)
1 Ready:
0: Not ready
1: Ready
2 Running:
0: The drive does not start if a reference other than zero is applied
1: Running, if a reference other than zero is applied, the drive can start
3 Operating detected error state:
0: Inactive
1: Active
4 Power section line supply present:
0: Power section line supply unavailable
1: Power section line supply present
5 Reserved (= 1)
6 Reserved (= 0 or 1)
7 Warning
0: No warning
1: Warning
8 Reserved (= 0)
9 Command via a network:
0: Command via the terminals or the Plain Text Display Terminal
1: Command via a network
10 Reference reached:
0: The reference is not reached
1: The reference has been reached
11 Reference outside limits:
0: The reference is within the limits
1: The reference is not within the limits
NOTE: When the drive is in speed mode, the limits are defined by LSP and HSP parameters.
12 Reserved (= 0)
13 Reserved (= 0)
14 Stop via STOP key:
0: STOP key not pressed
1: Stop triggered by the STOP key on the Plain Text Display Terminal
15 Direction of rotation:
0: Forward rotation at output
1: Reverse rotation at output
NOTE: The value is identical in the CiA402 profile and the I/O profile. In the I/O profile, the description of the values
is simplified and does not refer to the CiA402 (Drivecom) state chart.

EAV64387 12/2019 67
Display MOn-

[Modbus network diag] Mnd-Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Modbus network diag]

About This Menu

Used for the Modbus serial communication port at the bottom of the control block. Refer to the Modbus
serial embedded communication manual for a complete description.

[COM LED] MdB1

View of the Modbus communication LED.

[Mdb Frame Nb] M1Ct

Modbus network frames counter: number of processed frames.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Mb NET CRC errors] M1EC

Modbus network CRC error countered: number of CRC errors

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

68 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[Com. scanner input map] ISA- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Modbus network diag] [Com. scanner input map]

About This Menu

Used for CANopen® and Modbus network.

[Com Scan In1 val.] nM1

Com scanner input 1 value. Value of the first input word.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Com Scan In2 val.] nM2

Com scanner input 2 value. Value of the second input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 69).

[Com Scan In3 val.] nM3

Com scanner input 3 value. Value of the third input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 69).

[Com Scan In4 val.] nM4

Com scanner input 4 value. Value of the fourth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 69).

[Com Scan In5 val.] nM5

Com scanner input 5 value. Value of the fifth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 69).

[Com Scan In6 val.] nM6

Com scanner input 6 value. Value of the sixth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 69).

[Com Scan In7 val.] nM7

Com scanner input 7 value. Value of the seventh input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 69).

[Com Scan In8 val.] nM8

Com scanner input 8 value. Value of the eighth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 69).

EAV64387 12/2019 69
Display MOn-

[Com scan output map] OSA- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Com scan output map]

About This Menu

Used for CANopen® and Modbus networks.

[Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1

Com scanner output 1 value. Value of the first output word.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Com Scan Out2 val.] nC2

Com scanner output 2 value. Value of the second output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 70).

[Com Scan Out3 val.] nC3

Com scanner output 3 value. Value of the third output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 70).

[Com Scan Out4 val.] nC4

Com scanner output 4 value. Value of the fourth output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 70).

[Com Scan Out5 val.] nC5

Com scanner output 5 value. Value of the fifth output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 70).

[Com Scan Out6 val.] nC6

Com scanner output 6 value. Value of the sixth output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 70).

[Com Scan Out7 val.] nC7

Com scanner output 7 value. Value of the seventh output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 70).

[Com Scan Out8 val.] nC8

Com scanner output 8 value. Value of the eighth output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 70).

70 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[Modbus HMI Diag] MdH- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Modbus HMI Diag]

About This Menu

Used for the Modbus serial communication port at the front of the control block (used by the Plain Text
Display Terminal)

[COM LED] Mdb2

View of the Modbus HMI communication LED.

[Mdb NET frames] M2Ct

Terminal Modbus 2: number of processed frames.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Mdb NET CRC errors] M2EC

Terminal Modbus 2: number of CRC errors.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

EAV64387 12/2019 71
Display MOn-

[Command word image] CWI- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Command word image]

About This Menu

Command word image.

[Modbus Cmd] CMd1

Command word image built with Modbus port source.
Identical to [CMD Register] CMd (see page 65).

[COM. Module Cmd.] CMd3

Command word image built with fieldbus module source.
Identical to [CMD Register] CMd (see page 65).

[Freq. ref. word map] rWI- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Freq. ref. word map]

About This Menu

Frequency reference image.

[Modbus Ref Freq] LFr1

Frequency reference image built with Modbus port source (LFR_MDB).

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Com Module Ref Freq] LFr3

Frequency reference image built with fieldbus module source (LFR_COM).

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

72 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

Section 4.6
[Application parameters]

[Application parameters]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Variable Speed Pump]MPP- Menu 74
[Booster Control Pump] BCP- Menu 78

EAV64387 12/2019 73
Display MOn-

[Variable Speed Pump]MPP- Menu

Access
[Display] [Application parameters] [Variable Speed Pump]

[Available Pumps] mpan

Number of available pumps.
This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Archit] mpsa is set to a value different from [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Nb of Staged Pumps] mpsn

Number of staged pumps.
This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Archit] mpsa is set to a value different from [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Lead Pump] plid

Lead pump.

Setting Code / Value Description

[None] none None
[Pump 1] p01 Pump number 1
[Pump 2] p02 Pump number 2
[Pump 3] p03 Pump number 3
[Pump 4] p04 Pump number 4
[Pump 5] p05 Pump number 5
[Pump 6] p06 Pump number 6

[Next Staged Pump] pnts

Next pump to stage.
Identical to [Lead Pump] plid (see page 74).

[Next Destaged Pump] pntd

Next pump to destage.
Identical to [Lead Pump] plid (see page 74).

[Pump 1 State] p1s

Pump 1 state.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 1 or higher.

Setting Code / Value Description

[None] none Not configured
[Not Available] naul Unavailable
[Ready] rdy Ready
[Running] run Running

74 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[Pump 1 Type] p1t

Pump 1 type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 1 or higher.

Setting Code / Value Description

[None] none Undefined
[Lead] lead Lead pump
[Lead or Auxiliary] laf Lead or auxiliary fixed speed pump
[Lead or Auxiliary lav Lead or auxiliary variable speed pump
Variable]
[Auxiliary] auxf Auxiliary fixed speed pump
[Auxiliary Variable] auxv Auxiliary variable speed pump
[Error] err Error

[Pump 1 Runtime] p1ot

Pump 1 running time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 1 or higher.

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 s Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Pump 1 Nb Starts] p1ns

Pump 1 number of starts.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 1 or higher.

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 s Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Pump 2 State] p2s

Pump 2 state.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 2 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 State] p1s (see page 74).

[Pump 2 Type] p2t

Pump 2 type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 2 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Type] p1t (see page 75).

[Pump 2 Runtime] p2ot

Pump 2 running time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 2 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Runtime] p1ot (see page 75).

[Pump 2 Nb Starts] p2ns

Pump 2 number of starts.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 2 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Nb Starts] p1ns (see page 75).

EAV64387 12/2019 75
Display MOn-

[Pump 3 State] p3s

Pump 3 state.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 3 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 State] p1s (see page 74).

[Pump 3 Type] p3t

Pump 3 type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 3 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Type] p1t (see page 75).

[Pump 3 Runtime] p3ot

Pump 3 running time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 3 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Runtime] p1ot (see page 75).

[Pump 3 Nb Starts] p3ns

Pump 3 number of starts.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 3 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Nb Starts] p1ns (see page 75).

[Pump 4 State] p4s

Pump 4 state.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 4 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 State] p1s (see page 74).

[Pump 4 Type] p4t

Pump 4 type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 4 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Type] p1t (see page 75).

[Pump 4 Runtime] p4ot

Pump 4 running time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 4 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Runtime] p1ot (see page 75).

[Pump 4 Nb Starts] p4ns

Pump 4 number of starts.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 4 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Nb Starts] p1ns (see page 75).

[Pump 5 State] p5s

Pump 5 state.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 5 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 State] p1s (see page 74).

76 EAV64387 12/2019
 Display MOn-

[Pump 5 Type] p5t

Pump 5 type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 5 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Type] p1t (see page 75).

[Pump 5 Runtime] p5ot

Pump 5 running time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 5 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Runtime] p1ot (see page 75).

[Pump 5 Nb Starts] p5ns

Pump 5 number of starts.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 5 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Nb Starts] p1ns (see page 75).

[Pump 6 State] p6s

Pump 6 state.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 6.
Identical to [Pump 1 State] p1s (see page 74).

[Pump 6 Type] p6t

Pump 6 type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 6.
Identical to [Pump 1 Type] p1t (see page 75).

[Pump 6 Runtime] p6ot

Pump 6 running time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 6.
Identical to [Pump 1 Runtime] p1ot (see page 75).

[Pump 6 Nb Starts] p6ns

Pump 6 number of starts.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGN is set to 6.
Identical to [Pump 1 Nb Starts] p1ns (see page 75).

EAV64387 12/2019 77
Display MOn-

[Booster Control Pump] BCP- Menu

Access
[Display] [Application parameters] [Booster Control Pump]

[Booster Status] bCs

Booster status.

Setting Code / Value Description

[None] none Not configured
[Inactive] nact Inactive
[Running] run Running
[Stage Pending] stgp Stage pending
[Destage Pending] dstgp Destage pending
[Staging] stg Staging
[Destaging] dstg Destage in progress

78 EAV64387 12/2019
 Easy Altivar ATV610
Diagnostics dIA-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 5
[Diagnostics] dIA-

[Diagnostics] dIA-

Introduction

[Diagnostics] dIA- menu presents drive and application data useful when diagnostics is required.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
5.1 [Diag. data] 80
5.2 [Error history] pFH- Menu 83
5.3 [Warnings] ALr- Menu 86

EAV64387 12/2019 79
Diagnostics dIA-

Section 5.1
[Diag. data]

[Diag. data]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Diag. data] ddt- Menu 81
[Other State] SSt- Menu 82
[Identification] OId- Menu 82

80 EAV64387 12/2019
 Diagnostics dIA-

[Diag. data] ddt- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Diag. data]

About This Menu

This menu presents the actual warning and detected error in addition to drive data.

[Last Warning] LALr

Last warning which occurred.
The list of warning codes is available in the chapter "Diagnostics and Troubleshooting" (see page 304).

[Last Error] LFt

Last error which occurred.
The list of error codes is available in the chapter "Diagnostics and Troubleshooting" (see page 305).

[Nb Of Start] nSM

Number of motor starts (resettable).

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[Motor Run Time] rtHH

Motor run time.
Run elapsed time display (resettable) in 0.1 hours (length of time the motor has been switched on).

Setting Description
0.0...429,496,729.5 h Setting range
Factory setting: _

EAV64387 12/2019 81
Diagnostics dIA-

[Other State] SSt- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Diag. data] [Other State]

About This Menu

List of secondary states.

List
[Anti-Jam pending] JAMP
[Sleep Active] SLM
[Sleep Boost active] SLPb
[Sleep Check Active] ASLC
[Set 1 active] CFP1
[Set 2 active] CFP2
[Set 3 active] CFP3
[Set 4 active] CFP4
[Automatic restart] AUtO
[DC Bus Charged] dbL
[Fast stop Active] FSt
[Fallback Frequency] FrF
[Speed Maintained] rLS
[Type of stop] Stt
[Ref Freq Warning] SrA
[Forward] MFrd
[Reverse] MrrS
[Autotuning] tUn
[Identification] OId- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Diag. data] [Identification]

About This Menu

This is a read-only menu that cannot be configured. It enables the following information to be displayed:
 Drive reference, power rating, and voltage
 Drive software version
 Drive serial number
 Type of option modules present, with their software version
 Plain Text Display Terminal type and version

82 EAV64387 12/2019
 Diagnostics dIA-

Section 5.2
[Error history] pFH- Menu

[Error history] pFH- Menu

[Error history] pFH- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Error history]

About This Menu

This menu shows the 8 last detected errors (dP1 to dP8).
Pressing OK key on the selected error code in the Error history list displays the drive data recorded when
the error has been detected.
NOTE: Same content for [Last Error 1] dP1 to [Last Error 8] dP8.

[Last Error 1] dP1

Last error 1.
Identical to [Last Error] LFt (see page 81).

[Drive State] HS1

HMI status.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Autotuning] tun Autotuning
[In DC inject.] dCb Injection braking
[Ready] rdy Drive ready
[Freewheel] nSt Freewheel stop
[Drive Running] run Motor in steady state or run command present and zero
reference
[Accelerating] ACC Accelerating
[Decelerating] dEC Decelerating
[Current lim.] CLI Current limit
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[Motor fluxing] FLu Fluxing function is activated
[no mains V.] nLP Control is powered on but the DC bus is not loaded
[control.stop] CtL Controlled stop

[Last Error 1 Status] Ep1

Status of last error 1.
DRIVECOM status register (same as [ETA state word] EtA).

[ETI state word] Ip1

ETI state word.
ETI status register (see the communication parameter file).

[Cmd word] CMP1

Cmd word.
Command register (same as [Cmd word] CMd).

EAV64387 12/2019 83
Diagnostics dIA-

[Motor current] LCP1

Motor current (same as [Motor Current] LCr).

Setting Description
0...2*In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: _
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Output frequency] rFp1

Output frequency (same as [Output frequency] rFr).

Setting Description
-3,276.7...3,276.7 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Elapsed Time] rtp1

Elapsed time.

Setting Description
0...65,535 h Setting range
Factory setting: _

[DC bus voltage] ULp1

DC bus voltage (same as [DC bus voltage] VBUS).

Setting Description
0...921 Vdc Setting range: [No meas.] ULNUNK is displayed if no value is measured.
Factory setting: _

[Motor therm state] tHP1

Motor thermal state (same as [Motor Therm state] tHr).

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Command Channel] dCC1

Command channel (same as [Command channel] CMdC).

Setting Code / Value Description

[Terminals] tEr Terminal block
[Ref. Freq- LCC Plain Text Display Terminal
Rmt.Term]
[Modbus] Mdb Modbus serial
[Com. Module] nEt Fieldbus module

[Ref Freq Channel] drC1

Channel for reference frequency (same as [Ref Freq Channel] rFCC).
Identical to [Command channel] dCC1 (see page 84).

[Motor Torque] OtP1

Estimated motor torque value (same as [Motor Torque] Otr).

84 EAV64387 12/2019
 Diagnostics dIA-

NOTE: The displayed value is always positive in motor mode and negative in generator mode whatever
the direction.

Setting Description
-300...300% Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Drive Thermal State] tdP1

Measured drive thermal state (same as [Drive Therm State] tHd).

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: _

[IGBT Junction Temp] tJP1

Estimated junction temperature value.

Setting Description
0...255°C Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Switching Frequency] SFP1

Switching frequency applied (related to [Switching Frequency] SFr).

Setting Description
2...12 kHz Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Last Error 2] dP2 to [Last Error 8] dP8

Last error 2... Last error 8
Identical to [Last Error1] dP1 (see page 83).

EAV64387 12/2019 85
Diagnostics dIA-

Section 5.3
[Warnings] ALr- Menu

[Warnings] ALr- Menu

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Actual warnings] ALrd- Menu 87
[Warnings] ALr- Menu 87

86 EAV64387 12/2019
 Diagnostics dIA-

[Actual warnings] ALrd- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Warnings] [Actual warnings]

About This Menu

List of current warnings.
If a warning is active, and appears on the Plain Text Display Terminal.

List of Available Warnings

The list of warning codes is available in the chapter "Diagnostics and Troubleshooting" (see page 304).

[Warnings] ALr- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Warnings]

About This Menu

This menu presents the warning history (30 past warnings).

[Warning History] ALH

Identical to [Last warning] LALr.

EAV64387 12/2019 87
Diagnostics dIA-

88 EAV64387 12/2019
 Easy Altivar ATV610
Complete settings CSt-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 6
[Complete settings] CSt-

[Complete settings] CSt-

Introduction

[Complete settings] CSt- menu presents all the settings related to drive functions for:
 Motor and drive configuration
 Application functions
 Monitoring functions

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
6.1 [Motor parameters] MPA- Menu 90
6.2 [Input/Output] IO- Menu 101
6.3 [Command and Reference] CrP- Menu 134
6.4 [Generic functions] - [Ramp] 145
6.5 [Generic functions] - [+/- speed] 149
6.6 [Generic functions] - [Stop configuration] 152
6.7 [Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection] 157
6.8 [Generic functions] - [Jog] 160
6.9 [Generic functions] - [Preset speeds] 162
6.10 [Generic functions] - [Jump frequency] 166
6.11 [Generic functions] - [Define system units] SUC- Menu 168
6.12 [Generic functions] - [PID controller] 172
6.13 [Generic functions] - [Sleep/wakeup] SPW- Menu 192
6.14 [Generic functions] - [Threshold reached] 217
6.15 [Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command] 219
6.16 [Generic functions] - [Parameters switching] 221
6.17 [Generic functions] - [Stop after speed timeout] 225
6.18 [Generic functions] - [Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu 227
6.19 [Generic functions] - [Booster control] 230
6.20 [Generic monitoring] 242
6.21 [Error/Warning handling] 251
6.22 [Maintenance] 274

EAV64387 12/2019 89
Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.1
[Motor parameters] MPA- Menu

[Motor parameters] MPA- Menu

[Motor parameters] MPA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters]

About This Menu

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Fully read and understand the manual of the connected motor.
 Verify that all motor parameters are correctly set by referring to the nameplate and the manual of the
connected motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

[Motor Standard] bFr

Motor standard.
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters:
 [High Speed] HSP
 [Motor Freq Thd] Ftd
 [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS
 [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS
 [Max Frequency] tFr

Setting Code / Value Description

[50 Hz IEC] 50 IEC
Factory setting
[60 Hz NEMA] 60 NEMA

[Nominal motor Power] nPr

Nominal motor power.
Rated motor power given on the nameplate, in kW if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [50Hz IEC] 50, in
HP if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60Hz NEMA] 60.

Setting Description
According to drive rating –
Factory setting: according to the drive rating

[Nom Motor Voltage] UnS

Nominal motor voltage.
Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate.

Setting Description
100...690 V Setting range
Factory setting: according to drive rating and [Motor Standard] bFr

90 EAV64387 12/2019
 Complete settings CSt-

[Nom Motor Current] nCr

Rated motor current given on the nameplate.

Setting Description
0.25...1.5 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: according to drive rating and [Motor Standard] bFr
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Nominal Motor Freq] FrS

Nominal motor frequency.
The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to 60 Hz.

Setting Description
40.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 50 Hz

[Nominal Motor Speed] nSP

Nominal motor speed.
If the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, use any 1 of the formulas
to calculate the rated speed:

 Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x

 Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors)

 Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors).

Setting Description
0...65,535 rpm Setting range
Factory setting: according to drive rating

[Max Frequency] tFr

Maximum output frequency.
The factory setting is 60 Hz, or preset to 72 Hz if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to 60 Hz.
It is recommended to have [Max Frequency] TFR equal to or higher than 110% of [High Speed] HSP.

Setting Description
10.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 60 Hz

[Motor Th Current] ItH

Motor thermal monitoring current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate.

Setting Description

0.2...1.1 In (1) Setting range

Factory setting: According to drive rating
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

EAV64387 12/2019 91
Complete settings CSt-

[Output Ph Rotation] PHr

Output phase rotation.
Modifying this parameter operates as an inversion of 2 of the 3 motor phases. This results in changing the
direction of rotation of the motor.

Setting Code / Value Description

[ABC] AbC Standard rotation
Factory setting
[ACB] ACb Opposite rotation

[Motor Control Type] Ctt

Motor control type.
NOTE: Select the motor control type before entering parameter values.

Setting Code / Value Description

[U/F VC Standard] Std Standard motor control type. For applications that require torque at low
speed. Simple motor control type keeping a constant Voltage Frequency
ratio, with a possible adjustment of the curve bottom. This motor control
type is used for motors connected in parallel.

Factory setting
NOTE: U0 is the result of an internal calculation based on motor
parameters and multiplied by UFr (%). U0 can be adjusted by modifying
UFr value.

92 EAV64387 12/2019
 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[U/F VC 5pts] UFS 5–segment V/F profile: As [U/F VC Standard] Std profile but also
supports the avoidance of resonance (saturation).

The profile is defined by the values of parameters UnS, FrS, U1 to U5

and F1 to F5.
FrS > F5 > F4 > F3 > F2 > F1
NOTE: U0 is the result of an internal calculation based on motor
parameters and multiplied by UFr (%). U0 can be adjusted by modifying
UFr value.
[U/F VC Quad.] UFq Motor control type dedicated to variable torque applications, typically used
for pumps and fans.
[U/F VC Energy ECO Specific motor control type optimized for energy saving.
Sav.]

[U/F Profile] PFL

U/F profile.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [U/F VC Quad.] UFq.
This parameter is used to adjust the fluxing current level at zero speed, in % of nominal motor current at
nominal speed.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 30%

[U1] U1
Voltage point 1 on 5 points V/F.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0...800 V Setting range according to rating
Factory setting: 0 V

EAV64387 12/2019 93
Complete settings CSt-

[F1] F1
Frequency point 1 on 5 points V/F.
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[U2] U2
Voltage point 2 on 5 points V/F.
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0...800 V Setting range according to rating
Factory setting: 0 V

[F2] F2
Frequency point 2 on 5 points V/F.
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[U3] U3
Voltage point 3 on 5 points V/F.
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0...800 V Setting range according to rating
Factory setting: 0 V

[F3] F3
Frequency point 3 on 5 points V/F.
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

94 EAV64387 12/2019
 Complete settings CSt-

[U4] U4
Voltage point on 4 points V/F.
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0...800 V Setting range according to rating
Factory setting: 0 V

[F4] F4
Frequency point 4 on 5 points V/F.
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[U5] U5
Voltage point 5 on 5 points V/F.
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0...800 V Setting range according to rating
Factory setting: 0 V

[F5] F5
Frequency point 5 on 5 points V/F.
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[IR compensation] UFr

This parameter is used to optimize torque at low speed, or to adapt to special cases (for example: for
motors connected in parallel, decrease [IR compensation] UFr). If there is insufficient torque at low
speed, increase [IR compensation] UFr. A too high value can avoid the motor to start (locking) or change
the current limiting mode.

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

EAV64387 12/2019 95
Complete settings CSt-

[Slip compensation] SLP

Slip compensation.
This parameter is set to 0% when [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [U/F VC Quad.] UFq.
The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessarily exact.
If the slip setting is lower than the actual slip, the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state,
but at a lower speed than the reference.
If the slip setting is higher than the actual slip, the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.

Setting Description
0...300% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Switching frequency] SFr

Drive switching frequency.

NOTICE
DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Verify that the switching frequency of the drive does not exceed 4 kHz if the EMC filter is disconnected
for operation of the drive in an IT mains.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Adjustment range: The maximum value is limited to 4 kHz if [Motor surge limit.] SVL parameter is
configured.
If [Sinus Filter Activation] OFI is set to [Yes] YES, the minimum value is 2 kHz and the maximum value
is limited to 6 kHz or 8 kHz according to drive rating.
NOTE: In the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive automatically reduces the switching frequency
and reset it once the temperature returns to normal.
In case of high-speed motor, it is advised to increase the PWM frequency [Switching frequency] SFr at
8, 12 kHz

Setting Description
2...12 kHz according to drive rating Setting range
Factory setting: 4.0 kHz or 2.5 kHz according to the drive rating

[Switch Freq Type] SFt

Switching frequency type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.
The motor switching frequency is modified (reduced) when the internal temperature of the drive is too high.

Setting Code / Value Description

[SFR type 1] HF1 Heating optimization
Allows the system to adapt the switching frequency according to the motor
frequency. This setting optimizes the heating loss of the drive in order to
improve the drive efficiency.
Factory setting
[SFR type 2] HF2 Allows the system to keep a constant chosen switching frequency
[Switching frequency] SFr whatever the motor frequency [Output
frequency] rFr.
With this setting, the motor noise is kept as low as possible for a high
switching frequency.
In the event of overheating, the drive automatically decreases the switching
frequency.
It is restored to its original value when the temperature returns to normal.

96 EAV64387 12/2019
 Complete settings CSt-

[Noise Reduction] nrd

Motor noise reduction.
Random frequency modulation helps to prevent any resonance, which may occur at a fixed frequency.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Fixed frequency
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Frequency with random modulation

[Motor Surge Limit.] SVL

Surge voltage limitation.
This function limits motor over voltages and is useful in the following applications:
 NEMA motors
 Old or poor quality motors
 Spindle motors
 Rewound motors

This parameter can remain set to [No] nO for 230/400 Vac motors used at 230 Vac, or if the length of cable
between the drive and the motor does not exceed:
 4 m with unshielded cables
 10 m with shielded cables

NOTE: When [Motor Surge Limit.] SVL is set to [Yes] yes, the maximum switching frequency
[Switching freq.] SFr is modified.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Function active

[Attenuation Time] SOP

Attenuation time.
The value of the [Volt surge limit. opt ] SOP parameter corresponds to the attenuation time of the cable
used. It has been defined to prevent the superimposition of voltage wave reflections resulting from long
cable lengths. It limits over voltages to twice the DC bus rated voltage.
As surge voltage depends on many parameters such as types of cable, different motor powers in parallel,
different cable lengths in parallel, etc., we recommend using an oscilloscope to check the over voltage
values obtained at the motor terminals.
For long cable lengths, an output of the filter or a dV/dt filter must be used.
To retain the overall drive performance, do not increase the SOP value unnecessarily.

Setting Code / Value Description

[6] 6 6 µs
[8] 8 8 µs
Factory setting
[10] 10 10 µs

EAV64387 12/2019 97
Complete settings CSt-

[Current Limitation] CLI

Internal current limit.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
 Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor.
 Verify that the parameter [Current Limitation] CLi is set to a value lower or equal to the value shown
in this table.
 Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements
in determining the current limit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NOTE: If the setting is less than 0.25. In, the drive may lock in [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL if this has
been enabled. If it is less than the no-load motor current, the motor cannot run.

Setting Description
0...1.2 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 1.2 In(1)
(1) The maximum and factory setting value change to 1.5 In if [Dual Rating] DRT is set to [Heavy Duty] HIGH.

[Autotuning] tUn

WARNING
UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT
Autotuning moves the motor in order to tune the control loops.
 Only start the system if there are no persons or obstructions in the zone of operation.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

During autotuning, the motor makes small movement. Noise development and oscillations of the system
are normal.
In any case, the motor has to be stopped before performing a tune operation. Verify that the application
does not make the motor turn during the tune operation.
The tune operation optimizes:
 The motor performances at low speed.
 The estimation of the motor torque.
 The accuracy of the estimation of the process values in sensorless operation and monitoring.

Autotuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a “freewheel stop” or “fast stop”
function has been assigned to a digital input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
Autotuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands, which will be taken into account after the
autotuning sequence.
If autotuning has detected error, the drive always displays [No action] nO and, depending on the
configuration of [Tuning Error Resp] tnL, may switch to [Autotuning] tUn detected error mode.
Autotuning may last for several seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the Plain Text Display
Terminal to change to [No action] nO.
NOTE: The motor thermal state has a significant influence on the tuning result. Always perform a motor
tuning with the motor stopped and cold. Verify that the application does not have the motor operate during
a tuning operation.
To redo a motor tuning, wait that it is stopped and cold. Set first [Autotuning] tUn to [Erase Autotuning]
CLr, then redo the motor tuning.
The use of the motor tuning without doing a [Erase Autotuning] CLr first is used to get the thermal state
estimation of the motor.

98 EAV64387 12/2019
 Complete settings CSt-

The cable length has an influence on the tune result. If the wiring is modified, it is necessary to redo the
tune operation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No action] nO Autotuning not in progress

Factory setting
[Apply Autotuning] YES Autotuning is performed immediately if possible, then the parameter
automatically changes to [No action] nO. If the drive state does not allow
the tune operation immediately, the parameter changes to [No] nO and the
operation must be done again.
[Erase Autotuning] CLr The motor parameters measured by the autotuning function are reset. The
default motor parameter values are used to control the motor. [Autotuning
Status] tUS is set to [Not done] tAB.

[Autotuning Status] tUS

Autotuning status.
(for information only, cannot be modified)
This parameter is not saved at drive power-off. It shows the autotuning status since the last power-on.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not done] tAb The autotuning is not done

Factory setting
[Pending] PEnd The autotuning has been requested but not yet performed
[In Progress] PrOG The autotuning is in progress
[Failed] FAIL The autotuning has detected an error
[Done] dOnE The motor parameters measured by the autotuning function are used to
control the motor

[Dual rating] drt

Dual rating state

Settings Code / Value Description

[Normal Duty] nOrMAL Normal duty
Factory setting
[Heavy Duty] HIGH High duty

[Boost Activation] bOA

Boost activation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Inactive] nO No boost
[Dynamic] dYnA Dynamic boost, the magnetizing current value is modified according to the
motor load.
Factory setting
NOTE: Drive manages itself the value [Magnetizing Current] iDA to
optimize the performances.
[Static] StAt Static boost, the magnetizing current value follows the profile whatever the
motor load
NOTE: With this selection the [Boost] boo and [Freq Boost] FAb are
taken into account.
NOTE: This selection can be used for conical motor with [Boost] boo sets
to a negative value.

EAV64387 12/2019 99
Complete settings CSt-

[Boost] bOO
Value at 0 Hz: % of nominal magnetizing current (taken into account if different from 0).
A too high value of [Boost] bOO can result in a magnetic saturation of the motor, which leads to a torque
reduction.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Boost Activation] BOA is not set to [Inactive]No.

Setting Description
-100...100% Setting range
If [Boost Activation] BOA is set to [Dynamic] DYNA, [Boost] BOo is set
to 25%.
Factory setting: 0%

[Freq Boost] FAb

Value at 0 Hz: speed threshold to reach nominal magnetizing current.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Boost Activation] BOA is not set to [NO]No, and
 [Boost Activation] BOA is not set to [Constant]CSte.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 30.0 Hz

100 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.2
[Input/Output] IO- Menu

[Input/Output] IO- Menu

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Input/Output] IO- Menu 102
[DI1 Assignment] Li1C- Menu 104
[DI2 Assignment] LI2C- Menu 105
[DI3 Assignment] LI3C- Menu 105
[DI4 Assignment] LI4C- Menu 106
[DI5 Assignment] LI5C- Menu 106
[DI6 Assignment] LI6C- Menu 107
[DI11 Assignment] dI11- Menu 107
[DI12 Assignment] dI12- Menu 108
[DI13 Assignment] dI13- Menu 108
[DI14 Assignment] dI14- Menu 109
[DI15 Assignment] dI15- Menu 109
[DI16 Assignment] dI16- Menu 110
[Input/Output] IO- Menu 111
[AI1 configuration] AI1- Menu 113
[AI2 configuration] AI2- Menu 115
[AI3 configuration] AI3- Menu 117
[AI4 configuration] AI4- Menu 118
[AI5 configuration] AI5- Menu 119
[Virtual AI1] AV1- Menu 120
[DQ11 Configuration] dO11- Menu 121
[DQ12 Configuration] dO12- Menu 123
[R1 configuration] r1- Menu 124
[R2 configuration] r2- Menu 126
[R3 configuration] r3- Menu 127
[R4 configuration] r4- Menu 127
[R5 configuration] r5- Menu 128
[R6 configuration] r6- Menu 128
[AQ1 configuration] AO1- Menu 129
[AQ2 configuration] AO2- Menu 133

EAV64387 12/2019 101

Complete settings CSt-

[Input/Output] IO- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output]

[2/3-wire control] tCC

2-wire or 3-wire control.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If this parameter is changed, the parameters [Reverse Assign] rrS and [2-wire type] tCt and the
assignments of the digital inputs are reset to the factory setting.
Verify that this change is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[2-Wire Control] 2C 2-wire control (level commands): This is the input state (0 or 1) or edge (0
to 1 or 1 to 0), which controls running or stopping.
Example of source wiring:

DI1 Forward
DIx Reverse

Factory setting
[3-Wire Control] 3C 3-wire control (pulse commands) [3 wire]: A forward or reverse pulse is
sufficient to command starting, a stop pulse is sufficient to command
stopping.
Example of source wiring:

DI1 Stop
DI2 Forward
DIx Reverse

[2-wire type] tCt

Type of 2-wire control.
This parameter can be accessed if [2/3-wire control] tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that the parameter setting is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Level] LEL State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run (1) or stop (0)

102 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Transition] trn A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation in
order to avoid accidental restarts after a break in the supply mains
Factory setting
[Level With Fwd PFO State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the “forward” input
Priority] takes priority over the “reverse” input

[Reverse Assign] rrS

Reverse assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration

EAV64387 12/2019 103

Complete settings CSt-

[DI1 Assignment] Li1C- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI1 Assignment]

[DI1 Low Assignment] L1L

DI1 low assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with digital input DI1 in
order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

[DI1 High Assignment] L1H

DI1 high assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with digital input DI1 in
order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.
The digital input DI1 is assigned to:
 [Forward] FRD in 2-wire control
 [Run] RUN in 3-wire control.

[Run] RUN and [Forward] FRD settings cannot be modified manually.

NOTE: In IO profile, the assignment of [Run] RUN (respectively [Forward] FRD) switches to [CD00]
CD00 in 2-wire control (respectively 3-wire control).

[DI1 Delay] L1d

DI1 delay.
NOTE: Commands received via this digital input are processed once the delay time set via this parameter
has elapsed.

Setting Description
0...200 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 5 ms

104 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[DI2 Assignment] LI2C- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI2 Assignment]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI1 Assignment] LI1C- menu (see page 104).

[DI2 Low Assignment] L2L

DI2 low assignment.

[DI2 High Assignment] L2H

DI2 high assignment.
The digital input DI2 is assigned to [Forward] FRD in 3-wire control. [Forward] FRD setting cannot be
modified manually.
NOTE: In IO profile, the assignment of [Forward] FRD switches to [CD01] CD01 in 3-wire control.

[DI2 Delay] L2d

DI2 delay.

[DI3 Assignment] LI3C- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI3 Assignment]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI1 Assignment] LI1C- menu (see page 104).

[DI3 Low Assignment] L3L

DI3 low assignment.

[DI3 High Assignment] L3H

DI3 high assignment.

[DI3 Delay] L3d

DI3 delay.

EAV64387 12/2019 105

Complete settings CSt-

[DI4 Assignment] LI4C- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI4 Assignment]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI1 Assignment] LI1C- menu (see page 104).

[DI4 Low Assignment] L4L

DI4 low assignment.

[DI4 High Assignment] L4H

DI4 high assignment.

[DI4 Delay] L4d

DI4 delay.

[DI5 Assignment] LI5C- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI5 Assignment]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI1 Assignment] LI1C- menu (see page 104).

[DI5 Low Assignment] L5L

DI5 low assignment.

[DI5 High Assignment] L5H

DI5 high assignment.

[DI5 Delay] L5d

DI5 delay.

106 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[DI6 Assignment] LI6C- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI6 Assignment]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI1 Assignment] LI1C- menu (see page 104).

[DI6 Low Assignment] L6L

DI6 low assignment.

[DI6 High Assignment] L6H

DI6 high assignment.

[DI6 Delay] L6d

DI6 delay.

[DI11 Assignment] dI11- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI11 Assignment]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI1 Assignment] LI1C- menu (see page 104).
Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DI11 Low Assignment] L11L

DI11 low assignment.

[DI11 High Assignment] L11H

DI11 high assignment.

[DI11 Delay] L11d

DI11 delay.

EAV64387 12/2019 107

Complete settings CSt-

[DI12 Assignment] dI12- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI12 Assignment]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI1 Assignment] LI1C- menu (see page 104).
Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DI12 Low Assignment] L12L

DI12 low assignment.

[DI12 High Assignment] L12H

DI12 high assignment.

[DI12 Delay] L12d

DI12 delay.

[DI13 Assignment] dI13- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI13 Assignment]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI1 Assignment] LI1C- menu (see page 104).
Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DI13 Low Assignment] L13L

DI13 low assignment.

[DI13 High Assignment] L13H

DI13 high assignment.

[DI13 Delay] L13d

DI13 delay.

108 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[DI14 Assignment] dI14- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI14 Assignment]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI1 Assignment] LI1C- menu (see page 104).
Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DI14 Low Assignment] L14L

DI14 low assignment.

[DI14 High Assignment] L14H

DI14 high assignment.

[DI14 Delay] L14d

DI14 delay.

[DI15 Assignment] dI15- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI15 Assignment]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI1 Assignment] LI1C- menu (see page 104).
Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DI15 Low Assignment] L15L

DI15 low assignment.

[DI15 High Assignment] L15H

DI15 high assignment.

[DI15 Delay] L15d

DI15 delay.

EAV64387 12/2019 109

Complete settings CSt-

[DI16 Assignment] dI16- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI16 Assignment]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI1 Assignment] LI1C- menu (see page 104).
Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DI16 Low Assignment] L16L

DI16 low assignment.

[DI16 High Assignment] L16H

DI16 high assignment.

[DI16 Delay] L16d

DI16 delay.

110 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Input/Output] IO- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output]

[Ref Freq Template] bSP

Low speed management (template).
This parameter defines how the speed reference is taken into account, for analog inputs and pulse input
only. In the case of the PID controller, this is the PID output reference.
The limits are set by the [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP parameters.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Standard] bSd

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0, the frequency = [Low speed] LSP

Factory setting
[Pedestal] bLS

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0 to [Low speed] LSP, the frequency = [Low speed] LSP

[Deadband] bnS

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0 to LSP the frequency = 0

EAV64387 12/2019 111

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Deadband at 0%] bnS0

F Frequency
R Reference

This operation is the same as [Standard] bSd, except that in the following
cases at zero reference, the frequency = 0: The signal is less than [Min
nvalue], which is greater than 0 (example: 1 V on a 2–10 V input) The signal
is greater than [Min nvalue], which is greater than [Max value] (example:
11 V on a 10–0 V input).
If the input range is configured as “bidirectional”, operation remains identical
to [Standard] bSd.

112 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI1 configuration] AI1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI1 configuration]

About This Menu

The input can be delinearized by configuring an intermediate point on the input/output curve of this input:

R Reference
C / VI Current or Voltage Input
1 [Y Interm. point]
2 [Min value] (0%)
3 [X Interm. point]
4 [Max value] (100%)

NOTE: For [X Interm. point], 0% corresponds to [Min value] and 100% to [Max value].

[AI1 Assignment] AI1A

Analog input AI1 functions assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with input AI1 in order
to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

[AI1 Type] AI1t

Configuration of analog input AI1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
Factory setting
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA

[AI1 Min. value] UIL1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AI1 Max. value] UIH1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

EAV64387 12/2019 113

Complete settings CSt-

[AI1 Min. value] CrL1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AI1 Max. value] CrH1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

[AI1 filter] AI1F

AI1 cutoff time of the low filter.

Setting Description
0.00...10.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 s

[AI1 Interm. point X] AI1E

Input delinearization point coordinate. Percentage of the physical input signal.
0% corresponds to [AI1 min value] (U1LI)
100% corresponds to [AI1 max value] (U1HI)

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

[AI1 Interm. point Y] AI1S

Input delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).
Percentage of the internal frequency reference corresponding to the [AI1 Interm. point X] (AI1E)
percentage of physical input signal.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

114 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI2 configuration] AI2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI2 configuration]

[AI2 Assignment] AI2A

AI2 functions assignment.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 113).

[AI2 Type] AI2t

Configuration of analog input AI2.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[KTY] KtY 1 KTY84
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[PT1000] 1Pt3 1 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[PT100] 1Pt2 1 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[3PT1000] 3Pt3 3 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[3PT100] 3Pt2 3 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No

[AI2 min value] UIL2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 113).

[AI2 Max .value] UIH2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] UIH1 (see page 113).

[AI2 Min. value] CrL2

AI2 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 Min. value] CrL1 (see page 114) with factory setting: 4.0 mA.

[AI2 Max. value] CrH2

AI2 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] CrH1 (see page 114).

EAV64387 12/2019 115

Complete settings CSt-

[AI2 filter] AI2F

AI2 filter.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 114).

[AI2 Interm. point X] AI2E

AI2 delinearization input level.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] AI1E (see page 114).

[AI2 Interm. point Y] AI2S

AI2 delinearization output level.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] AI1S (see page 114).

116 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI3 configuration] AI3- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI3 configuration]

[AI3 Assignment] AI3A

AI3 functions assignment.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 113).

[AI3 Type] AI3t

Configuration of analog input AI3.
Identical to [AI2 Type] AI2t (see page 115).

[AI3 Min. value] UIL3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min. value] UIL1 (see page 113).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

[AI3 Max. value] UIH3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] UIH1 (see page 113).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

[AI3 Min. value] CrL3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min. value] CrL1 (see page 114).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

[AI3 Max. value] CrH3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] CrH1 (see page 114).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

[AI3 filter] AI3F

AI3 cutoff time of the low filter.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 114).

[AI3 X Interm. point] AI3E

AI3 delinearization input level.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] AI1E (see page 114).

[AI3 Y Interm. point] AI3S

AI3 delinearization output level.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] AI1S (see page 114).

EAV64387 12/2019 117

Complete settings CSt-

[AI4 configuration] AI4- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI4 configuration]

[AI4 Assignment] AI4A

AI4 functions assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 113).

[AI4 Type] AI4t

Configuration of analog input AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc

[AI4 Min value] UIL4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min value] UIL1 (see page 113).

[AI4 Max. value] UIH4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] UIH1 (see page 113).

[AI4 Min. value] CrL4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min. value] CrL1 (see page 114).

[AI4 Max. value] CrH4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] CrH1 (see page 114).

[AI4 filter] AI4F

AI4 cutoff time of the low filter.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 114).

[AI4 X Interm. point] AI4E

AI4 delinearization input level.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] AI1E (see page 114).

[AI4 Y Interm. point] AI4S

AI4 delinearization output level.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] AI1S (see page 114).

118 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI5 configuration] AI5- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI5 configuration]

[AI5 Assignment] AI5A

AI5 functions assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 113).

[AI5 Type] AI5t

Configuration of analog input AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI4 Type] AI4t. (see page 118)

[AI5 Min. value] UIL5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min. value] UIL1 (see page 113).

[AI5 Max. value] UIH5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] UIH1 (see page 113).

[AI5 Min. value] CrL5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min. value] CrL1 (see page 114).

[AI5 Max. value] CrH5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] CrH1 (see page 114).

[AI5 filter] AI5F

AI5 cutoff time of the low filter.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 114).

[AI5 X Interm. point] AI5E

AI5 delinearization input level.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] AI1E (see page 114).

[AI5 Y Interm. point] AI5S

AI5 delinearization output level.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] AI1S (see page 114).

EAV64387 12/2019 119

Complete settings CSt-

[Virtual AI1] AV1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [Virtual AI1]

[AIV1 Assignment] Av1A

Virtual AI1 function assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
[PID Feedback] PIF PI controller feedback
[Inst Flow Assign] FS1A Select the source of installation flow sensor
[Pump Flow FS2A Select the source of pump flow sensor
Assign]

120 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[DQ11 Configuration] dO11- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DQ11 Configuration]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DQ11 Assignment] dO11

Digital output 11 assignment.
Identical to [R2 Assignment] r2 (see page 126)

[DQ11 actv delay] d11d

DQ11 activation delay time.
The delay cannot be set for the [Operating State “Fault”] FLt and [Mains Contactor] LLC assignments,
and remains at 0.
The state modification only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information
becomes true.

Setting Description
0...60,000 ms Setting range
0...9,999 ms then 10.00...60.00 s on the Plain Text Display Terminal
Factory setting: 0 ms

[DQ11 status] d11S

DQ11 status (output active level).

Setting Code / Value Description

[1] POS State 1 when the information is true
Factory Setting
[0] nEG State 0 when the information is true

The configuration [1] POS cannot be modified for the following assignments:
 [Operating State "Fault"] Flt,
 [Mains Contactor] LLC,
 [Priming] PRIM,
 [Jockey] JOKY,
 [Pump 1 Cmd] MPO1,
 [Pump 2 Cmd] MPO2,
 [Pump 3 Cmd] MPO3,
 [Pump 4 Cmd] MPO4,
 [Pump 5 Cmd] MPO5,
 [Pump 6 Cmd] MPO6,

[DQ11 hold delay] d11H

DQ11 holding delay time.
The holding time cannot be set for the [Operating State “Fault”] FLt, and [Mains Contactor] LLC
assignments, and remains at 0.
The holding time cannot be set and remains at 0 for the following assignments:
 [Operating State "Fault"] Flt,
 [Mains Contactor] LLC,
 [Priming] PRIM,
 [Jockey] JOKY,
 [Pump 1 Cmd] MPO1,

EAV64387 12/2019 121

Complete settings CSt-

 [Pump 2 Cmd] MPO2,

 [Pump 3 Cmd] MPO3,
 [Pump 4 Cmd] MPO4,
 [Pump 5 Cmd] MPO5,
 [Pump 6 Cmd] MPO6,
The state modification only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information
becomes false.

Setting Description
0...9,999 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

122 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[DQ12 Configuration] dO12- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DQ12 Configuration]

About This Menu

Identical to [DQ11 Configuration] dO11- Menu (see page 121).
Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DQ12 Assignment] dO12

Digital output 12 assignment.

[DQ12 actv delay] d12d

DQ12 activation delay time.

[DQ12 status] d12S

DQ12 status (output active level).

[DQ12 hold delay] d12H

DQ12 holding delay time.

EAV64387 12/2019 123

Complete settings CSt-

[R1 configuration] r1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [R1 configuration]

[R1 Assignment] r1
R1 assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
[Operating State Fault] FLt Operating state fault
Factory setting
[Drive Running] rUn Drive running
[Mot Freq High Thd] FtA Motor frequency threshold ([Motor Freq Thd] FTD) reached
[High Speed Reached] FLA High speed reached
[Current Thd Reached] CtA Motor current threshold ([High Current Thd] CTD) reached
[Ref Freq Reached] SrA Frequency reference reached
[Motor Therm Thd Reached] tSA Motor thermal threshold ([Motor Therm Thd] TTD) reached
[PID Error Warning] PEE PID error warning
[PID Feedback Warning] PFA PID feedback warning
[AI2 4-20 Loss Warning] AP2 AI2 4-20 mA loss warning
[Mot Freq High Thd 2] F2A Second frequency threshold ([Freq. threshold 2] F2D) reached
[Drv Therm Thd Reached] tAd Drive thermal threshold reached
[Ref Freq High Thd Reached] rtAH Frequency reference high threshold reached
[Ref Freq Low Thd Reached] rtAL Frequency reference low threshold reached
[Mot Freq Low Thd] FtAL Frequency low threshold ([Low Freq.Threshold] FTDL) reached
[Motor Freq Low Thd 2] F2AL Second frequency low threshold ([2 Freq. Threshold] F2DL)
reached
[Low Current Reached] CtAL Current low threshold ([Low I Threshold] CTDL) reached
[Process Undld Warning] ULA Underload warning
[Process Overload Warning] OLA Overload warning
[PID High Fdbck Warning] pfaH PID feedback high threshold (PAH) reached
[PID Low Fdbck Warning] pfal PID feedback low threshold (PAL) reached
[Regulation Warning] pisH PID regulation unabled to reach the set point
[Forward] MFrd Run forward
[Reverse] MrrS Run reverse
[HMI Cmd] BMP Control via the Graphic Display Terminal is active. (only active with
Local/Remote button)
[Ramp switching] rp2 Ramp switching state
[set 1 active] CFP1 Parameter set 1 active
[set 2 active] CFP2 Parameter set 2 active
[set 3 active] CFP3 Parameter set 3 active
[DC Bus Charged] dbL DC bus charged
[I present] MCP Motor current present
[Warning Grp 1] AG1 Warning group 1
[Warning Grp 2] AG2 Warning group 2
[Warning Grp 3] AG3 Warning group 3
[Warning Grp 4] AG4 Warning group 4
[Warning Grp 5] AG5 Warning group 5
[External Error Warning] EFA External error warning
[Undervoltage Warning] USA Undervoltage warning
[Preventive UnderV Active] UPA Undervoltage prevention warning
[Drive Thermal Warning] tHA Drive thermal state warning

124 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[IGBT Thermal Warning] tJA Thermal junction warning
[AI3 4-20 Loss Warning] AP3 AI3 4-20 mA loss warning
[AI4 4-20 Loss Warning] AP4 AI4 4-20 mA loss warning
[AI5 4-20 Loss Warning] AP5 AI5 4-20 mA loss warning
[Ready] rdY Ready to start
[AI1 4-20 Loss Warning] AP1 AI1 4-20 mA loss warning
[Fallback speed] frf Reaction on event / fallback speed
[Speed Maintained] rls Reaction on event / maintain speed
[Per Type of Stop] stt Reaction on event / stop on STT without an error triggered after stop.
[AI3 Th Warning] tp3a Thermal 3 warning
[AI4 Th Warning] tp4a Thermal 4 warning
[AI5 Th Warning] tp5a Thermal 5 warning
[Pump 1 Cmd] mpo1 Pump 1 command
[Pump 2 Cmd] MPO2 Pump 2 command
[Pump 3 Cmd] MPO3 Pump 3 command
[Pump 4 Cmd] MPO4 Pump 4 command
[Pump 5 Cmd]] MPO5 Pump 5 command
[Pump 6 Cmd] MPO6 Pump 6 command
[Temp Sens AI2 Warn] TS2A Temperature sensor AI2 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI3 Warn] TS3A Temperature sensor AI3 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI4 Warn] TS4A Temperature sensor AI4 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI5 Warn] TS5A Temperature sensor AI5 warning (open circuit)

[R1 Delay time] r1d

R1 activation delay time.
The state modification takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes
true.
The delay cannot be set for the [Operating State Fault] FLt assignment; and remains at 0.

Setting Description
0...60,000 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

[R1 Active at] r1S

R1 status (output active level).

Setting Code / Value Description

1 POS State 1 when the information is true
Factory setting
0 nEG State 0 when the information is true

Configuration [1] POS cannot be modified for the [Operating State “Fault”] FLt assignment.

[R1 Holding time] r1H

R1 holding delay time.
The state modification takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes
false.
The holding time cannot be set for the [Operating State “Fault”] FLt assignment, and remains at 0.

Setting Description
0...9,999 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

EAV64387 12/2019 125

Complete settings CSt-

[R2 configuration] r2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [R2 configuration]

About This Menu

Identical to [R1 configuration] r1- Menu (see page 124).

[R2 Assignment] r2
R2 assignment.
Factory setting: [Drive Running] run
Identical to [R1 Assignment] r1 (see page 124) in addition to:

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] NO Not assigned
Factory setting
[Mains Contactor] LLC Mains contactor control
[Jockey] JOkY Jockey
[Priming] PrIM Priming

[R2 Delay time] r2d

R2 activation delay time.

[R2 Active at] r2S

R2 status (output active level).

[R2 Holding time] r2H

R2 holding delay time.

126 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[R3 configuration] r3- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [R3 configuration]

About This Menu

Identical to [R1 configuration] r1- Menu (see page 124).

[R3 Assignment] r3
R3 assignment.
Factory setting: [Ready] rdY
Identical to [R2 Assignment] r2 (see page 126).

[R3 Delay time] r3d

R3 activation delay time.

[R3 Active at] r3S

R3 status (output active level).

[R3 Holding time] r3H

R3 holding delay time.

[R4 configuration] r4- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [R4 configuration]

About This Menu

Identical to [R1 configuration] r1- Menu (see page 124).
Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3204 relay output option module has been inserted.

[R4 Assignment] r4
R4 assignment.
Identical to [R2 Assignment] r2 (see page 126).

[R4 Delay time] r4d

R4 activation delay time.

[R4 Active at] r4S

R4 status (output active level).

[R4 Holding time] r4H

R4 holding delay time.

EAV64387 12/2019 127

Complete settings CSt-

[R5 configuration] r5- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [R5 configuration]

About This Menu

Identical to [R1 configuration] r1- Menu (see page 124).
Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3204 relay output option module has been inserted.

[R5 Assignment] r5
R5 assignment.
Identical to [R2 Assignment] r2 (see page 126).

[R5 Delay time] r5d

R5 activation delay time.

[R5 Active at] r5S

R5 status (output active level).

[R5 Holding time] r5H

R5 holding delay time.

[R6 configuration] r6- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [R6 configuration]

About This Menu

Identical to [R1 configuration] r1- Menu (see page 124).
Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3204 relay output option module has been inserted.

[R6 Assignment] r6
R6 assignment.
Identical to [R2 Assignment] r2 (see page 126).

[R6 Delay time] r6d

R6 activation delay time.

[R6 Active at] r6S

R6 status (output active level).

[R6 Holding time] r6H

R6 holding delay time.

128 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AQ1 configuration] AO1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AQ1 configuration]

Minimum and Maximum Output Values

The minimum output value, in volts, corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the
maximum value corresponds to its upper limit. The minimum value may be greater than the maximum
value.

PA Parameter assigned
C / VO Current or voltage output
UL Upper limit
LL Lower limit
1 [Min Output] AOLx or UOLx
2 [Max Output] AOHx or UOHx

Scaling of the Assigned Parameter

The scale of the assigned parameter can be adapted in accordance with the requirements by modifying
the values of the lower and upper limits with two parameters for each analog output.
These parameters are given in %. 100% corresponds to the total variation range of the configured
parameter, so: 100% = upper limit - lower limit.
For example, [Sign. torque] Stq which varies between –3 and +3 times the rated torque, 100%
corresponds to 6 times the rated torque.
 The [Scaling AQx min] ASLx parameter modifies the lower limit: new value = lower limit + (range x
ASLx). The value 0% (factory setting) does not modify the lower limit.
 The [Scaling AQx max] ASHx) parameter modifies the upper limit: new value = lower limit + (range x
ASLx). The value 100% (factory setting) does not modify the upper limit.
 [Scaling AQx min] ASLx must always be lower than [Scaling AQx max] ASHx.

EAV64387 12/2019 129

Complete settings CSt-

UL Upper limit of the assigned parameter

LL Lower limit of the assigned parameter
NS New scale
1 ASHx
2 ASLx

Application Example
The value of the motor current at the AQ1 output is to be transferred with 0...20 mA, range 2 in motor, In
motor being the equivalent of a 0.8 In drive.
 The [Motor Current] OCr parameter varies from 0 to 2 times the rated drive current.
 [Scaling AQ1 min] ASL1 must not modify the lower limit, which therefore remains at its factory setting
of 0%.
 [Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1 must modify the upper limit by 0.5x the rated motor torque, or 100 - 100/5
= 80% (new value = lower limit + (range x [Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1).

[AQ1 Assignment] AO1

AQ1 assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
[Motor Current] OCr Current in the motor, from 0 to 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the
Installation manual and on the drive nameplate)
[Motor Frequency] OFr Output frequency, from 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
Factory Setting
[Ramp out.] OrP From 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[Motor torq.] trq Motor torque, from 0 to 3 times the rated motor torque
[Sign. torque] Stq Signed motor torque, between –3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ sign corresponds to the motor mode and the – sign to the generator mode
(braking).
[sign ramp] OrS Signed ramp output, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[PID ref.] OPS PID controller reference between [Min PID reference] PIP1 and [Max
PID reference] PIP2
[PID feedbk] OPF PID controller feedback between [Min PID feedback] PIF1 and [Max PID
feedback] PIF2
[PID error] OPE PID controller detected error between –5% and +5% of [Max PID feedback]
PIF2 – [Min PID feedback] PIF1
[PID output] OPI PID controller output between [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP
[Motor power] OPr Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Nominal Motor Power] nPr
[Mot thermal] tHr Motor thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state

130 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Drv thermal] tHd Drive thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Sig. o/p frq.] OFS Signed output frequency, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[Motor volt.] UOP Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS
[Inlet Pressure PS1u Inlet pressure value
Value]
[Outlet Pressure PS2u Outlet pressure value
Value]
[Installation Flow] FS1u Installation flow value

[AQ1 Type] AO1t

AQ1 type.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting

[AQ1 min output] AOL1

AQ1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 4.0 mA

[AQ1 max output] AOH1

AQ1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

[AQ1 min Output] UOL1

AQ1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AQ1 max Output] UOH1

AQ1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

[Scaling AQ1 min] ASL1

AQ1 scaling parameter of 0%.

EAV64387 12/2019 131

Complete settings CSt-

Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

Setting Description
0.0...100.0% Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0%

[Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1

AQ1 scaling parameter of 100%.
Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

Setting Description
0.0...100.0% Setting range
Factory setting: 100.0%

[AQ1 Filter] AO1F

AQ1 cutoff time of the low-filter.

Setting Description
0.00...10.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 s

132 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AQ2 configuration] AO2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AQ2 configuration]

[AQ2 assignment] AO2

AQ2 assignment.
Possible assignments: Identical to [AQ1 assignment] AO1

[AQ2 Type] AO2t

AQ2 type.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting

[AQ2 min output] AOL2

AQ2 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 min output] AOL1 (see page 131).

[AQ2 max output] AOH2

AQ2 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 max output] AOH1 (see page 131).

[AQ2 min Output] UOL2

AQ2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 min Output] UOL1 (see page 131).

[AQ2 max Output] UOH2

AQ2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 max Output] UOH1 (see page 131).

[Scaling AQ2 min] ASL2

AQ2 scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [Scaling AQ1 min] ASL1 (see page 131).

[Scaling AQ2 max] ASH2

AQ2 scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1 (see page 132).

[AQ2 Filter] AO2F

AQ2 cutoff time of the low-filter.
Identical to [AQ1 Filter] AO1F (see page 132).

EAV64387 12/2019 133

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.3
[Command and Reference] CrP- Menu

[Command and Reference] CrP- Menu

[Command and Reference] CrP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Command and Reference]

Command and Reference Channels Parameter Can Be Accessed

Run commands (forward, reverse, stop, and so on) and references can be sent using the following
channels:

Command Reference
Terminals: Digital inputs DI Terminals: Analog inputs AI, pulse input
Plain Text Display Terminal Plain Text Display Terminal
Integrated Modbus Integrated Modbus
Fieldbus module Fieldbus module
– +/– speed via the Plain Text Display Terminal

NOTE: The stop keys on the Plain Text Display Terminal can be programmed as non-priority keys. A stop
key can only have priority if the [Stop Key Enable] PSt parameter menu is set to [Stop Key Priority ]
YES.
The behavior of the drive can be adapted according to requirements:
 [Not separ.] SIM: Command and reference are sent via the same channel.
 [Separate] SEP: Command and reference may be sent via different channels.In these configurations,
control via the communication bus is performed in accordance with the DRIVECOM standard with only
5 freely assignable bits (see communication parameter manual). The application functions cannot be
accessed via the communication interface.
 [I/O profile] IO: The command and the reference can come from different channels. This configuration
both simplify and extends use via the communication interface. Commands may be sent via the digital
inputs on the terminals or via the communication bus. When commands are sent via a bus, they are
available on a word, which acts as virtual terminals containing only digital inputs. Application functions
can be assigned to the bits in this word. More than one function can be assigned to the same bit.
NOTE: Stop commands from the Plain Text Display Terminal remain active even if the terminals are not
the active command channel.

134 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Reference Channel for [Not separ.] SIM, [Separate] SEP and [I/O profile] IO Configurations, PID Not Configured

(1) Note: Forced local is not active in [I/O].

The black square represents the factory setting assignment.

Fr1: terminals (including I/O extension module), Plain Text Display Terminal, integrated Modbus, and
fieldbus module.
Fr2: terminals (including I/O extension module), Plain Text Display Terminal, integrated Modbus, +/–
speed, and fieldbus module.

EAV64387 12/2019 135

Complete settings CSt-

Reference Channel for [Not separ.] SIM, [Separate] SEP and [I/O profile] IO Configurations, PID Configured with PID
References at the Terminals

(1) Note: Forced local is not active in [I/O profile].

(2) Ramps not active if the PID function is active in automatic mode.

The black square represents the factory setting assignment.

Fr1: terminals (including I/O extension module), Plain Text Display Terminal, integrated Modbus, and
fieldbus module.
Fr2: terminals (including I/O extension module), Plain Text Display Terminal, integrated Modbus, +/–
speed, and fieldbus module.

Command Channel for [Not separ.] SIM configuration

Reference and command, not separate.
The command channel is determined by the reference channel. The parameters FR1, FR2, RFC,
FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command.
Example: If the reference is Fr1 = AI1 (analog input at the terminals), control is via DI (digital input at
the terminals).

136 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

The black square represents the factory setting assignment.

Command Channel for [Separate] Sep configuration

Separated Reference and command.
The parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command.
Example: If the reference is in forced local mode via AI1 (analog input at the terminals), command in forced
local mode is via DI (digital input at the terminals).
The command channels CD1 and CD2 are independent of the reference channels FR1 and FR2.

The black square represents the factory setting assignment, except for [Control Mode] CHCF.

[Cmd channel 1] Cd1 and [Cmd channel 2] Cd2: Terminals, Plain Text Display Terminal, fieldbus
module

EAV64387 12/2019 137

Complete settings CSt-

Command Channel for I/O profile io configuration

Separated Reference and command, as in [Separate] Sep configuration.
The command channels CD1 and CD2 are independent of the reference channels FR1 and FR2.

The black square represents the factory setting assignment, except for [Control Mode] CHCF.

[Cmd channel 1] Cd1 and [Cmd channel 2] Cd2: Terminals, Plain Text Display Terminal, fieldbus
module
A command or an action can be assigned:
 To a fixed channel by selecting a Digital input (Dix) or a Cxxx bit:
 By selecting, for example, LI3, this action will be triggered by the digital input DI3 regardless of which
command channel is switched.
 By selecting, for example, C114, this action will be triggered by integrated Modbus with bit 14
regardless of which command channel is switched.
 To a switchable channel by selecting a CDxx bit:
 By selecting, for example, Cd11, this action will be triggered by: LI12 if the terminals channel is active,
C111 if the integrated Modbus channel is active, C311 if the communication card channel is active.
If the active channel is the graphic display terminal, the functions and commands assigned to CDxx
switchable internal bits are inactive.
NOTE: Several CDxx does not have equivalent digital inputs and can only be used for switching between
2 networks.

[Low Speed] LSP

Motor frequency at low speed.

Setting Description

0...500 Hz Setting range

Factory setting: 0 Hz

[High Speed] HSP

Motor frequency at high speed.
It is recommended to have [Max Frequency] TFR equal to or higher than 110% of [High Speed] HSP.

Setting Description

0...500 Hz Setting range

Factory setting: 500 Hz

138 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1

Configuration reference frequency 1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
[AI1] AI1 Analog input AI1
Factory Setting
[AI2]...[AI3] AI2...AI3 Analog input AI2...AI3
[AI Virtual 1] AIv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted
[Ref.Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC Reference Frequency via remote terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been
Module] inserted
[DI5 PulseInput PI5...PI6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment]...[DI6
PulseInput
Assignment]

[Reverse Disable] rIn

Reverse directions disable.
Lock of movement in reverse direction does not apply to direction requests sent by digital inputs.
Reverse direction requests sent by digital inputs are taken into account.
Reverse direction requests sent by the Plain Text Display Terminal or sent by the line are not taken into
account.
Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID, and so on, is interpreted as a zero reference (0 Hz).

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
[Yes] YES Yes
Factory Setting

[Stop Key Enable] PSt

Stop key enable.
Setting this function to no disables the STOP key of the Display Terminal if the setting of the parameter
[Command Channel] CMdC is not [Ref. Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Only set this parameter to nO if you have implemented appropriate alternative stop functions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Irrespective of the configuration of [Stop Key Enable] PSt, if the active command channel is the Plain
Text Display Terminal, the STOP/RESET key performs:
 in run, a stop according to the [Type of stop] Stt,
 in “Operating State Fault", a fault reset command.

The following table gives the behavior of the function when the Plain Text Display Terminal is not the active
command channel:

Setting Code / Value Description

[Stop Key No nO Disables the STOP/RESET key on the Plain Text Display Terminal.
Priority]
[Stop Key Priority] YES Gives priority to the STOP key on the Plain Text Display Terminal.
Only the stop function is enabled. The stop is performed in freewheel.
Factory Setting

EAV64387 12/2019 139

Complete settings CSt-

[Control Mode] CHCF

Mixed mode configuration.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Disabling [I/O profile] IO resets the drive to the factory settings.
 Verify that restoring the factory settings is compatible with the type of wiring used.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not separ.] SIM Reference and command, not separate
Factory Setting
[Separate] SEP Separate reference and command. This assignment cannot be accessed in
[I/O profile] IO
[I/O profile] IO I/O profile

[Command Switching] CCS

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This parameter can cause unintended movements, for example an inversion of the direction of the
rotation of the motor, a sudden acceleration or a stop.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not cause unintended movements.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Control channel switch.

This parameter can be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Separate] SEP or to [I/O profile] IO.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, channel [Cmd channel 1] Cd1 is active.If the assigned input or bit is at
1, channel [Cmd channel 2] Cd2 is active.
NOTE: Activating this function from an other active command channel will also activate the monitoring of
this new channel.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Command Cd1 Command channel = channel 1 (for CCS)
channel 1] Factory setting
[Command Cd2 Command channel = channel 2 (for CCS)
channel 2]
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration

140 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Cmd channel 1] Cd1

Command channel 1 assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Separate] SEP or [I/O profile] IO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Terminals] tEr Terminal block source
Factory Setting
[Ref.Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC Command via Plain Text Display Terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Command via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Command via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been inserted
Module]

[Cmd channel 2] Cd2

Command channel 2 assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Separate] SEP or [I/O profile] IO.
Identical to [Cmd channel 1] Cd1 with factory setting [Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb.

[Freq Switch Assign] rFC

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This parameter can cause unintended movements, for example an inversion of the direction of the
rotation of the motor, a sudden acceleration or a stop.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not cause unintended movements.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

frequency switching assignment.

If the assigned input or bit is at 0, channel [Ref Freq Channel 1] FR1 is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, channel [Ref Freq Channel 2] FR2 is active.
NOTE: Activating this function from an other active command channel will also activate the monitoring of
this new channel.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ref Freq Channel Fr1 Reference channel = channel 1 (for RFC)
1]
[Ref Freq Channel Fr2 Reference channel = channel 2 (for RFC)
2]
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration

EAV64387 12/2019 141

Complete settings CSt-

[Ref Freq 2 Config] Fr2

Configuration reference frequency 2.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned. If [Control Mode] CHCF is set to[ Not separ.] SIM, the
command is at the terminals with a zero reference. If [Control Mode]
CHCF is set to [Separate] SEP or [I/O profile] IO, the reference is zero.
Factory Setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref Frequency via UPdt +/– speed command assigned to DIx
DI]
[Ref.Freq- LCC Reference frequency via Graphic Display Terminal
Rmt.Term]
[Ref. Freq- Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
Modbus]
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been
Module] inserted
[PulseInput PI5...PI6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment On
DI5]...[PulseInput
Assignment On
DI6]

[Copy Ch1-Ch2] COP

Copy channel 1 reference frequency to channel 2.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This parameter can cause unintended movements, for example an inversion of the direction of the
rotation of the motor, a sudden acceleration or a stop.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not cause unintended movements.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Can be used to copy the current reference and/or the command with switching in order to avoid speed
surges, for example.
If [Control Mode] CHCF (see page 140) is set to [Not separ.] SIM or [Separate] SEP, copying is
possible only from channel 1 to channel 2.
If [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [I/O profile] IO, copying is possible in both directions.A reference or a
command cannot be copied to a channel on the terminals.The reference copied is [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq]
FrH (before ramp) unless the destination channel reference is set via +/– speed. In this case, the
reference copied is [Output frequency] rFr (after ramp).

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No copy
Factory Setting
[Reference SP Copy reference
Frequency]
[Command] Cd Copy command
[Cmd + Ref ALL Copy reference and command
Frequency]

As the Plain Text Display Terminal may be selected as the command and/or reference channel, its action
modes can be configured.

142 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Comments:
 The Plain Text Display Terminal command/reference is only active if the command and/or reference
channels from the terminal are active except for BMP with Local/ Remote key (command via the Plain
Text Display Terminal), which takes priority over these channels. Press Local/ Remote key again to
revert control to the selected channel.
 Command and reference via the Plain Text Display Terminal are impossible if the latter is connected to
more than one drive.
 The preset PID reference functions can only be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Not separ.]
SIM or [Separate] SEP.
 The command via the Plain Text Display Terminal can be accessed regardless of the [Control Mode]
CHCF.

[Forced Local Freq] FLOC

Forced local reference source assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned (control via the terminals with zero reference)
Factory Setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref.Freq- LCC Graphic Display Terminal
Rmt.Term]
[PulseInput PI5...PI6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment On
DI5]...[PulseInput
Assignment On
DI6]

[Time-out Forc. Local] FLOt

Time for channel confirmation after forced local.
This parameter can be accessed if [Forced Local Assign] FLO is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.1...30.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 s

[Forced Local Assign] FLO

Forced local assignment.
Forced local mode is active when the input is at state 1.
[Forced Local Assign] FLO is forced to [No] nO if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [I/O profile] IO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted

EAV64387 12/2019 143

Complete settings CSt-

[HMI cmd.] bMP

HMI command.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Stop] StOP Stops the drive (although the controlled direction of operation and reference
of the previous channel are copied (to be taken into account on the next
RUN command))
[Bumpless] bUMP Does not stop the drive (the controlled direction of operation and the
reference of the previous channel are copied)
[Disabled] dIS Disabled
Factory Setting

144 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.4
[Generic functions] - [Ramp]

[Generic functions] - [Ramp]

[Ramp] rAMP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Ramp]

[Ramp Type] rPt

Type of ramp.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Linear] LIn Linear ramp
Factory setting
[S-Ramp] S S ramp
[U-Ramp] U U ramp
[Customized] CUS Customer ramp

[Ramp increment] Inr

This parameter is valid for [Acceleration] ACC, [Deceleration] dEC, [Acceleration 2] AC2 and
[Deceleration 2] dE2.
This table presents the parameter settings:

Setting Code / Value Description

[0.01] 0.01 Ramp up to 99.99 seconds
[0.1] 0.1 Ramp up to 999.9 seconds
Factory setting
[1] 1 Ramp up to 6,000 seconds

[Acceleration] ACC
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS.
To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the
application.

Setting Description

0.00...6,000.00 s (1) Setting range

Factory setting: 30.0 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 according to [Ramp increment] Inr

[Deceleration] dEC
Time to decelerate from the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS to 0.
To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the
application.

Setting Description

0.00...6,000.00 s (1) Setting range

Factory setting: 30.0 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 according to [Ramp increment] Inr

EAV64387 12/2019 145

Complete settings CSt-

[Begin Acc round] tA1

Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] ACC or [Acceleration 2] AC2 ramp
time.
Can be set from 0 to 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is set to [Customized] CUS.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 10%

[End Acc round] tA2

Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] ACC or [Acceleration 2] AC2 ramp
time.
Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Acc round] tA1).
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is set to [Customized] CUS.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 10%

[Begin Dec round] tA3

Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] dEC or [Deceleration 2] dE2 ramp
time.
Can be set from 0 to 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is set to [Customized] CUS.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 10%

[End Dec round] tA4

Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] dEC or [Deceleration 2] dE2 ramp
time.
Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Dec round] tA3).
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is [Customized] CUS.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 10%

146 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[SwitchRamp2] Frt
Ramp switching threshold
The second ramp is switched if the value of [SwitchRamp2] Frt is not 0 (0 deactivates the function) and
the output frequency is greater than [SwitchRamp2] Frt.
Threshold ramp switching can be combined with [Ramp switch Assign] rPS switching as follows:

DI or Bit Frequency Ramp

0 < Frt ACC, dEC
0 > Frt ACC, dE2
1 < Frt ACC, dE2
1 > Frt ACC, dE2

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Ramp switch Assign] rPS

Ramp switching.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration

[Acceleration 2] AC2
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Nominal motor freq.] FrS. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of
this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.
This parameter can be accessed if [SwitchRamp2] Frt is greater than 0 or if [Ramp switch Assign] rPS
is assigned.

Setting Description
0.0...6,000 s (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 5.0 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] Inr.

EAV64387 12/2019 147

Complete settings CSt-

[Deceleration 2] dE2
Time to decelerate from the [Nominal motor freq.] FrS to 0. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of
this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.
This parameter can be accessed if [SwitchRamp2] Frt is greater than 0 or if [Ramp switch Assign] rPS
is assigned.

Setting Description

0.0...6,000 s (1) Setting range

Factory setting: 5.0 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] Inr.

[Dec.Ramp Adapt] brA

Deceleration ramp adaptation.

Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at a too low value
according to the inertia of the load, which can cause an overvoltage detected error.
The function is incompatible with applications requiring:
 Positioning on a ramp

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive
[Yes] YES Function active, for applications that do not require strong deceleration
Factory setting
[High torq. A] dYnA Addition of a constant current flow component.
The [High torq. A] dYnA selection appears depending on the rating of the
drive and [Motor control type] Ctt. It enables stronger deceleration to be
obtained than with [Yes] YES. Use comparative testing to determine your
selection
When [Dec.Ramp Adapt] brA is configured on [High torq. x] dYnx, the
dynamic performances for braking are improved by the addition of a current
flow component. The aim is to increase the iron loss and magnetic energy
stored in the motor.

148 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.5
[Generic functions] - [+/- speed]

[Generic functions] - [+/- speed]

[+/- speed] Upd- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [+/- speed]

About This Menu

This function can be accessed if reference channel [Ref Freq 2 Config] Fr2 is set to [Ref Frequency via
DI] UPdt
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
2 types of operations are available:
 Use of single action keys: 2 digital inputs are required in addition to the operating directions.
The input assigned to the “+ speed” command increases the speed, the input assigned to the “– speed”
command decreases the speed.
 Use of double action keys: Only one digital input assigned to “+ speed” is required.

+/– speed with double-press buttons:

Description: 1 button pressed twice (2 steps) for each direction of rotation. A contact closes each time the
button is pressed.

Setting Released (– Speed) First Press (Speed Second Press (Faster)

Maintained)
Forward button – a a and b
Reverse button – c c and d

DI1 Forward
DIx Reverse
DIy + speed

EAV64387 12/2019 149

Complete settings CSt-

Do not use this +/– speed type with a 3-wire control.

Whichever type of operation is selected, the max. speed is set by [High speed] HSP.
NOTE: If the reference is switched via [Freq Switch Assign] rFC from any reference channel to another
reference channel with "+/– speed", the value of reference [Motor Frequency] rFr (after ramp) may be
copied at the same time in accordance with the [Copy Ch1-Ch2] COP parameter.
This helps to prevent the speed from being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place.

[+ Speed Assign] USP

Increase speed input assignment.
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration

[- Speed Assign] dSP

Down speed input assignment. See the assignment conditions.
Parameter settings identical to [+ Speed Assign] USP.
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1.

150 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Ref Frequency Save] Str

Reference frequency saves. This parameter can be accessed if [+ Speed Assign] USP is not set to [Not
Assigned] nO or [- Speed Assign] dSP is not set to [Not Assigned] no.
Associated with the "+/– speed" function, this parameter can be used to save the reference:
 When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM).
 When the supply mains or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM).

Therefore, next time the drive starts up, the speed reference is the last reference frequency saved.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No save] nO Not saved
Factory setting
[Save to RAM] rAM +/- speed with saving of the reference frequency in RAM
[Save to EEprom] EEP +/- speed with saving of the reference frequency in EEPROM

EAV64387 12/2019 151

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.6
[Generic functions] - [Stop configuration]

[Generic functions] - [Stop configuration]

[Stop configuration] Stt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Stop configuration]

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

[Type of stop] Stt

Normal stop mode.
Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command.

Setting Code / Value Description

[On Ramp] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[Freewheel] nSt Freewheel stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection stop.

[Freewheel stop] nSt

Freewheel stop.
The stop is activated when the input or the bit changes to 0. If the input returns to state 1 and the run
command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3-wire control] tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C
and if [2-wire type] tCt is set to [Level] LEL or [Fwd priority] PFO. If not, a new run command must
be sent.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[DI1 (Low L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
level)]...[DI6 (Low
level)]
[DI11 (Low L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if VW3A3203 I/O extension
level)]...[DI16 (Low module has been inserted
level)]

152 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Freewheel stop Thd] FFt

Freewheel stop threshold.
Speed threshold below which the motor switches to freewheel stop.
This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed
threshold.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Type of stop] Stt is set to [Fast stop] FSt or [On Ramp] rMP, and
 [Auto DC Injection] AdC is not configured.

Setting Description
0.2...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.2 Hz

[Fast stop Assign] FSt

Fast stop.
The stop is activated when the input changes to 0 or the bit changes to 1 (bit in [I/O profile] IO at 0).
If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3-wire
control] tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C and if [2-wire type] tCt is set to [Level] LEL or [Fwd
priority] PFO.
If not, a new run command must be sent.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[DI1 (Low L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
level)]...[DI6 (Low
level)]
[DI11 (Low L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if VW3A3203 I/O extension
level)]...[DI16 (Low module has been inserted
level)]

[Ramp Divider] dCF

Fast Stop deceleration ramp reduction coefficient.
The ramp that is enabled ([Deceleration] dEC or [Deceleration 2] dE2) is then divided by this coefficient
when stop requests are sent.
Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time.

Setting Description
0...10 Setting range
Factory setting: 4

EAV64387 12/2019 153

Complete settings CSt-

[DC Injection Assign] dCI

DC injection brake assignment.

WARNING
UNINTENDED MOVEMENT
 Do not use DC injection to generate holding torque when the motor is at a standstill.
 Use a holding brake to keep the motor in the standstill position.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

DC injection braking is initiated when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1.
If the input returns to state 0 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3-wire
control] tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C and if [2-wire type] tCt is set to [Level] LEL or [Fwd
priority] PFO. If not, a new run command must be sent.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration

[DC inject. level 1] IdC

DC injection current.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Level of DC injection braking current activated via digital input or selected as stop mode.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC injection] dCI, or
 [DC.Brake DI] dCI is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.1...1.41 In (1) Setting range
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.
Factory setting: 0.7 In (1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

154 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[DC injection time 1] tdI

DC injection time 1.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Maximum current injection time [DC inject. level 1] IdC. After this time, the injection current becomes
[DC inject. level 2] IdC2.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC injection] dCI, or
 [DC.Brake DI] dCI is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.1...30 s Setting range
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.
Factory setting: 0.5 s

[DC inject. level 2] IdC2

DC injection current 2.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Injection current activated by digital input or selected as stop mode once period [DC injection time 1] tdI
has elapsed.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC injection] dCI, or
 [DC Injection Assign] dCI is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.1 In (1)...[DC inject. level 1] IdC Setting range
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.
Factory setting: 0.5 In (1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

EAV64387 12/2019 155

Complete settings CSt-

[DC Inj Time 2] tdC

2nd DC injection time.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] IdC2 for injection, selected as stop mode only.
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC injection] dCI.

Setting Description
0.1...30 s Setting range
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.
Factory setting: 0.5 s

156 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.7
[Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection]

[Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection]

[Auto DC injection] AdC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Auto DC injection]

About This Menu

This menu presents the automatic injection of motor current function. This is used to hold the rotor of the
motor at the end of the deceleration ramp.

[Auto DC Injection] AdC

Automatic DC Injection.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
If the parameter [Auto DC Injection] ADC is set to [Continuous] Ct, DC injection is always active, even
if the motor does not run.
 Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
UNINTENDED MOVEMENT
 Do not use DC injection to generate holding torque when the motor is at a standstill.
 Use a holding brake to keep the motor in the standstill position.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Automatic current injection on stopping (at the end of the ramp).

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No injection
[Yes] YES Adjustable injection time
Factory setting
[Continuous] Ct Continuous standstill injection

[Auto DC inj Level 1] SdC1

Auto DC injection level 1.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Level of standstill DC injection current.

This parameter can be accessed if[Auto DC Injection] AdC is not set to [No] nO.

EAV64387 12/2019 157

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Description

0...1.1 In (1) Setting range

Factory setting: 0.7 In (1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Auto DC Inj Time 1] tdC1

Auto DC injection time 1.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC Injection] AdC is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.1...30.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.5 s

[Auto DC inj Level 2] SdC2

Auto DC injection level 2.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Second level of standstill DC injection current.

This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC Injection] AdC is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...1.1 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 0.5 In (1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

158 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Auto DC Inj Time 2] tdC2

Auto DC injection time 2.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Second standstill injection time.

This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC Injection] AdC is set to [YES] Yes.

AdC SdC2 Operation

YES x

Ct ≠0

Ct =0

Run command

Speed

Setting Description
0.0...30.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 s

EAV64387 12/2019 159

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.8
[Generic functions] - [Jog]

[Generic functions] - [Jog]

[Jog] jOG- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Jog]

[Jog Assign]Jog
Jog assignment.
The JOG function is only active if the command channel and the reference channels are on the terminals.
This function can be used if:
 [PID Feedback] PiF is set to [Not Configured] no, and
 [Ref Freq 2 Config] FR2 is not set to [Ref Frequency via DI] UPDT.

The function is active when the assigned input or bit is at 1.

Example: 2-wire control operation ([2/3-Wire Control] tCC = [2-Wire Control ] 2C.

MF Motor frequency
Rf Reference
Rp Ramp
Rp: 0.1 s Ramp forced to 0.1 S
Fw Forward
R Reverse

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration

160 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration

[Jog frequency] JGF

This parameter can be accessed if [Jog Assign] JOG is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Hz

[Jog Delay] JGt

This parameter can be accessed if [Jog Assign] (JOG) is not set to [No] (nO).

Setting Description
0.0...2.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.5 s

EAV64387 12/2019 161

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.9
[Generic functions] - [Preset speeds]

[Generic functions] - [Preset speeds]

[Preset speeds] PSS- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Preset speeds]

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

Combination Table for Preset Speed Inputs

2, 4, 8 or 16 speeds can be preset, requiring 1, 2, 3 or 4 digital inputs respectively.
It is necessary to configure:
 2 and 4 speeds in order to obtain 4 speeds.
 2, 4 and 8 speeds in order to obtain 8 speeds.
 2, 4, 8 and 16 speeds in order to obtain 16 speeds.

16 Preset Freq 8 Preset Freq (PS8) 4 Preset Freq (PS4) 2 Preset Freq (PS2) Speed Reference
(PS16)
0 0 0 0 Reference 1 (1)
0 0 0 1 SP2
0 0 1 0 SP3
0 0 1 1 SP4
0 1 0 0 SP5
0 1 0 1 SP6
0 1 1 0 SP7
0 1 1 1 SP8
1 0 0 0 SP9
1 0 0 1 SP10
1 0 1 0 SP11
1 0 1 1 SP12
1 1 0 0 SP13
1 1 0 1 SP14
1 1 1 0 SP15
1 1 1 1 SP16

(1) Reference 1 = SP1, refer to diagram (see page 134)

[2 Preset Freq] PS2

2 preset freq assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration

162 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration

[4 Preset Freq] PS4

4 preset freq assignment.
Identical to [2 Preset Freq] PS2
To obtain 4 speeds, you must also configure 2 speeds.

[8 Preset Freq] PS8

8 preset freq assignment.
Identical to [2 Preset Freq] PS2
To obtain 8 speeds, you must also configure 2 and 4 speeds.

[16 Preset Freq] PS16

16 preset freq assignment.
Identical to [2 Preset Freq] PS2
To obtain 16 speeds, you must also configure 2, 4 and 8 speeds.

[Preset speed 2] SP2

Preset speed 2. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Hz

[Preset speed 3] SP3

Preset speed 3. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 Hz

[Preset speed 4] SP4

Preset speed 4. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 30.0 Hz

EAV64387 12/2019 163

Complete settings CSt-

[Preset speed 5] SP5

Preset speed 5. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 25.0 Hz

[Preset speed 6] SP6

Preset speed 6. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 30.0 Hz

[Preset speed 7] SP7

Preset speed 7. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 35.0 Hz

[Preset speed 8] SP8

Preset speed 8. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 40.0 Hz

[Preset speed 9] SP9

Preset speed 9. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 45.0 Hz

[Preset speed 10] SP10

Preset speed 10. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 50.0 Hz

[Preset speed 11] SP11

Preset speed 11. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 55.0 Hz

164 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Preset speed 12] SP12

Preset speed 12. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 60.0 Hz

[Preset speed 13] SP13

Preset speed 13. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 70.0 Hz

[Preset speed 14] SP14

Preset speed 14. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 80.0 Hz

[Preset speed 15] SP15

Preset speed 15 See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 90.0 Hz

[Preset speed 16] SP16

Preset speed 16. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 162).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 100.0 Hz

EAV64387 12/2019 165

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.10
[Generic functions] - [Jump frequency]

[Generic functions] - [Jump frequency]

[Jump frequency] JUF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Jump frequency]

About This Menu

This function helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated
frequency.
This function can be used to help prevent reaching a frequency, which could cause resonance. Setting the
parameter to 0 disables the function.
The following figure is an example of the jump frequency function with one skip frequency defined by [Skip
Frequency] JPF:

F Frequency
t time
JPF [Skip frequency]
JFH [Skip.Freq.Hysteresis]
FRH [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq]
FRH_out [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] after the jump frequency function

[Skip Frequency] JPF

Jump frequency.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Skip Frequency 2] JF2

Jump frequency 2.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[3rd Skip Frequency] JF3

Jump frequency 3.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

166 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Skip.Freq.Hysteresis] JFH
Jump frequency bandwidth.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one skip frequency JPF, JF2, or JF3 is different from 0.
Skip frequency range: between JPF – JFH and JPF + JFH for example.
This adjustment is common to the 3 frequencies JPF, JF2, JF3.

Setting Description
0.1...10.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 1.0 Hz

EAV64387 12/2019 167

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.11
[Generic functions] - [Define system units] SUC- Menu

[Generic functions] - [Define system units] SUC- Menu

[Define system units] SUC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Define system units]

About This Menu

In order to be easy to configure, commission, operate, and maintain, the drive uses the application units.
The physicals that are concerned by application units are:
 Pressure values
 Flow rate values
 Temperature values
 Currency values

NOTE: Some other default system units are automatically deduced from configurable system units or from
other parameters.
System unit applies by default to all communication parameters and HMI (Plain Text Display Terminal,
Web server, DTM-based software).
When a system unit is changed, there is no rescaling of values. Numerical values are kept, but the meaning
of these values is not the same:
 After a change, the behavior of the product will not change (the system stays numerically the same).
 If new values are written through communication or through HMI in new unit, then the behavior is
impacted. In that case, all parameters should be reconfigured according to the new selected unit.
 In order to avoid issues due to a modification of system unit parameters, system units should be
modified only during the installation of the product and before the commissioning of the functions.
The precision of the physical values is selected at the same time as the unit.
By default, values are signed.
Default range of values are:

16 bits values 32 bits values

-32,768...32,767 -2,147,483,648...2,147,483,648

[P sensor unit] SUPr

Default system application unit used for pressure.
Available pressure units:

Unit Symbol Conversion

Kilo Pascal kPa 100 kPa = 1 bar
Millibar mbar
Bar bar
Pound / square psi 14.5 psi = 1 bar
inch (lb/in²) psig
Inch H2O inH2O 1 inH2O 4°C = 0.0024908891 bar (0.036127292 psi)
Inch water gauge inWG
Inch water column inWC
Feet water gauge ftWG 1 inH2O 4°C = 0.0298906692 bar (0.433527504 psi)
Feet water column ftWC
Feet ft
Meter water gauge mWG 1 mH2O(4°C) = 0.0980665 bar (1.42233433 psi)
Meter water mWC (mCE)
column m
Meter
Inch of mercury inHg 1 inHg = 0.0338638864 bar (0.491154147 psi)

168 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Unit Symbol Conversion

Percentage % –
w/o unit – –

Setting Code / Value Description

[1Kpa] PA 1 kpa
[1mbar] 1MbAr 1 mbar
[1Bar] bAr 1 bar
[0.1Bar] 0.1bAr 0.1 bar
Factory setting
[0.01Bar] 0.01bAr 0.01 bar
[1 PSI] PSI 1 Psi
[0.1 PSI] 0.1PSI 0.1 psi
[1 PSIG] PSIG 1 Psig
[0.1 PSIG] 0.1PSIG 0.1 Psig
[1inH20] 1InH20 1 inH20
[1inWg] 1InWG 1 inWg
[1inWC] 1InWC 1 inWc
[1 FtWg] 1FtWG 1 FtWg
[1 FtWC] 1FtWC 1 FtWC
[1 Ft] 1Ft 1 Ft
[1 MWG] 1MWG 1 mWg
[0.1 MWG] 0.1MWG 0.1 mWg
[1 MWC] 1MWC 1 mWC
[0.1 MWC] 0.1MWC 0.1 mWC
[1m] 1M 1m
[0.1 m] 0.1M 0.1 m
[1 inHG] 1InHG 1 inHg
[0.1%] 0.1? 0.1%
[0.1] 0.1 W?O 0.1 w/o

[Flow rate unit] SUFr

Default system application unit used for flow rate.
Available flow units:

Unit Symbol Conversion

Liter / second l/s –
Liter / minute l/min –
Liter / hour l/h –
Cubic decimeter / minute dm3/min –
Cubic meter / second m3/s –
Cubic meter / minute m3/min –
Cubic meter / hour m3/h –
Gallon per second gal/s 1 usgal = 3,785411784 l
Gallon per minute gal/min; GPM –
Gallon per hour gal/h –
Cubic feet / second ft3/s 1 ft3 = 28.317 l
Cubic feet / minute ft3/min; CFM, –
SCFM
Cubic feet / hour ft3/h –
Percentage % –
w/o unit – –

EAV64387 12/2019 169

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[1 L/s] 1LS L/s
[l/s] 01LS 0.1 L/s
[1 L/m] 1LM L/m
[1 L/h] 1Lh L/h
[1 dm3/mn] 1DM3M d3/m
[1 m3/s] 1M3S M3/s
[0.1 m3/s] 01M3S 0.1 M3/s
[1m3/m] 1M3Mn M3/min
[0.1 m3/m] 01M3Mn 0.1 M3/min
[1 m3/h] 1M3h 1 M3/h
[0.1m3/h] 01M3h 0.1 M3/h
Factory setting
[1 gal/s] 1GPS 1 Gal/s
[1 GPM] 1GPM 1 GPM
[1 gal/h] 1GPH 1 Gal/h
[1 ft3/s] 1CFS 1 ft3/s
[1CFM] 1CFM 1 CFM
[1SCFM] 1SCFM 1 SCFM
[1 Ft3/h] 1CFH 1 ft3/h
[1 Kg/s] 1GS 1 kg/s
[1 Kg/m] 1GM 1 kg/m
[1 Kg/h] 1GH 1 kg/h
[1 Lb/s] 1LbS 1 lb/s
[1 Lb/m] 1LbM 1 lb/m
[1 Lb/h] 1LbH 1 lb/h
[0.1%] 01PC 0.1%
[0.1] 01WO 0.1 w/o

[Temperature unit] SUtp

Default system application unit used for temperature.
Available temperature units:

Unit Symbol Conversion

Celsius Degree °C –
Fahrenheit Degree °F TF = 9/5*Tc+32
Percentage % –
w/o unit – –

Setting Code / Value Description

[0.1°C] 01C 0.1 °C
Factory setting
[0.1°F] 01F 0.1 °F
[0.1%] 01PC 0.1%
[0.1] 01WO 0.1 w/o

170 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Currency unit list] SUCU

Default system application unit used for currency.

Setting Code / Value Description

[EURO] EUrO Euro
[$] dollar Dollar
[£] pound Pound
[Krone] Kr Krone
[Renminbi] rMb Renminbi
Factory setting
[Other] OtHEr Other

[Liquid Density] rHO

Density of the fluid to be pumped.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is not set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Description
100...10,000 kg/m3 Setting range
Factory setting: 1000 kg/m3

EAV64387 12/2019 171

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.12
[Generic functions] - [PID controller]

[Generic functions] - [PID controller]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[PID controller] PId- Overview 173
[PID Feedback] Fdb- Menu 177
[PID Reference] rF- Menu 183
[PID preset references] PrI- Menu 186
[PID Reference] rF- Menu 188
[Settings] St- Menu 189

172 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[PID controller] PId- Overview

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

Block Diagram
The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PID feedback (measurement).

The PID feedback needs to be assigned to one of the analog inputs AI1 to AI5 or a pulse input, according
to whether any I/O extension module has been inserted.
The PID reference needs to be assigned to the following parameters:
 Preset references via digital inputs ([Ref PID Preset 2] rP2, [Ref PID Preset 3] rP3, [Ref PID Preset
4]rP4).
 In accordance with the configuration of [Intern PID Ref] PII:
 [Internal PID ref] rPI, or
 Reference A [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 .

EAV64387 12/2019 173

Complete settings CSt-

Combination Table for Preset PID References:

DI (Pr4) DI (Pr2) Pr2 = nO Reference

0 0
0 1 rP2
1 0 rP3
1 1 rP4

A predictive speed reference can be used to initialize the speed on restarting the process.
Scaling of feedback and references:
 [Min PID feedback] PIF1, [Max PID feedback] PIF2 parameters can be used to scale the PID
feedback (sensor range). This scale must be maintained for all other parameters.
 [Min PID Process] PIP1, [Max PID Process] PIP2 parameters can be used to scale the adjustment
range, for example the reference. Check that the adjustment range remains within the sensor range.
The maximum value of the scaling parameters is 32,767. To facilitate the installation, it is recommended
to use values as close as possible to this maximum level, while retaining powers of 10 in relation to the
actual values. The scaling is without unit if [Type of control] tOCt is set to [NA] nA, in % if set to
[OTHER] OtHEr, in process unit if set to [PRESSURE] PrESS or [FLOW] FLOW.

Example
Adjustment of the volume in a tank, 6...15 m3.
3 3
 Probe used 4-20 mA, 4.5 m for 4 mA and 20 m for 20 mA, with the result that PIF1 = 4,500 and
PIF2 = 20,000.
 Adjustment range 6 to 15 m3, with the result that PIP1 = 6,000 (min. reference) and PIP2 = 15,000
(max. reference).
 Example references:
 rP1 (internal reference) = 9,500
 rP2 (preset reference) = 6,500
 rP3 (preset reference) = 8,000
 rP4 (preset reference) = 11,200

Other parameters:
 Reversal of the direction of correction [PID Inversion] PIC. If [PID Inversion] PIC is set to [No] nO,
the speed of the motor increases when the detected error is positive (for example pressure control with
a compressor). If [PID Inversion] PIC is set to [Yes] YES, the speed of the motor decreases when
the detected error is positive (for example temperature control using a cooling fan).
 The integral gain may be short-circuited by a digital input.
 A warning on the [PID feedback Assign] PiF may be configured.
 A warning on the [PID error] rPE may be configured.

174 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

"Manual - Automatic" Operation with PID

This function combines the PID controller, the preset speeds, and a manual reference. Depending on the
state of the digital input, the speed reference is given by the preset speeds or by a manual reference input
via the PID function.
Manual PID reference [Manual PID reference] PIM:
 Analog inputs AI1 to AI5
 Pulse inputs

Predictive speed reference [Predictive Speed Ref] FPI:

 [AI1] AI1: analog input
 [AI2] AI2: analog input
 [AI3] AI3: analog input
 [AI4] AI4: analog input if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted
 [AI5] AI5: analog input if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted
 [DI5 PulseInput Assignment] PI5: pulse input
 [DI6 PulseInput Assignment] PI6: pulse input
 [Ref.Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC: Plain Text Display Terminal
 [Modbus] Mdb: integrated Modbus
 [Com. Module] nEt: fieldbus option module (if inserted)

Setting Up the PID Controller

1. Configuration in PID mode.
Refer to the Block Diagram (see page 173).
2. Perform a test in factory settings mode.
To optimize the drive, adjust [PID Prop.Gain] rPG or [PID Intgl.Gain] rIG gradually and independently,
and observe the effect on the PID feedback in relation to the reference.
3. If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect.

Step Action
1 Perform a test with a speed reference in Manual mode (without PID controller) and with the drive on load
for the speed range of the system:
 In steady state, the speed must be stable and comply with the reference, and the PID feedback signal
must be stable.
 In transient state, the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly, and the PID feedback must
follow the speed. If not, see the settings for the drive and/or sensor signal and wiring.
2 Switch to PID mode.
3 Set [PID ramp] PrP to the minimum permitted by the mechanism without triggering an [DC Bus
Overvoltage] ObF.
4 Set the integral gain [PID Intgl.Gain] rIG to minimum.
5 Leave the derivative gain [PID derivative gain] rdG at 0.
6 Observe the PID feedback and the reference.
7 Switch the drive ON/OFF a number of times or vary the load or reference rapidly a number of times.
8 Set the proportional gain [PID Prop.Gain] rPG in order to ascertain the compromise between response
time and stability in transient phases (slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing).
9 If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state, gradually increase the integral gain [PID
Intgl.Gain] rIG, reduce the proportional gain [PID Prop.Gain] rPG in the event of instability (pump
applications), find a compromise between response time and static precision (see diagram).
10 Lastly, the derivative gain may permit the overshoot to be reduced and the response time to be
improved, although this is more difficult to obtain a compromise in terms of stability, as it depends on 3
gains.
11 Perform in-production tests over the whole reference range.

EAV64387 12/2019 175

Complete settings CSt-

The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics:

Parameter Rise time Overshoot Stabilization time Static error

rPG + -- + = -
rIG + - ++ + --
rdG + = - - =

176 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[PID Feedback] Fdb- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [PID controller] [Feedback]

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

[Type of Control] tOCt

Type of control for the PID = unit choice.

Setting Code / Value Description

[nA] nA No units
Factory setting
[Pressure] PrEss Pressure control and unit
[Flow] Flow Flow control and unit
[Other] Other Other control and unit (%)

[PID Feedback] PIF

PID controller feedback.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[AI Virtual 1] AIv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[PulseInput PI5...PI6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment On
DI5]...[PulseInput
Assignment On
DI6]

[AI1 Type] AI1t

Configuration of analog input AI1.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI1] AI1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
Factory setting
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA

[AI1 min value] UIL1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI1] AI1, and
 [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

EAV64387 12/2019 177

Complete settings CSt-

[AI1 max value] UIH1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI1] AI1, and
 [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

[AI1 min. value] CRL1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI1] AI1, and
 [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AI1 max. value] CrH1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI1] AI1, and
 [AI Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

[AI2 Type] AI2t

Configuration of analog input AI2.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI2] AI2

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[KTY] KtY 1 KTY84
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[PT1000] 1Pt3 1 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[PT100] 1Pt2 1 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[3PT1000] 3Pt3 3 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[3PT100] 3Pt2 3 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No

178 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI2 min value] UIL2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI2] AI2, and
 [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 177).

[AI2 max value] UIH2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI2] AI2, and
 [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 178).

[AI2 min. value] CrL2

AI2 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI2] AI2, and
 [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 178) with factory setting: 0.4 mA.

[AI2 max. value] CrH2

AI2 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI2] AI2, and
 [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 178).

[AI3 Type] AI3t

Configuration of analog input AI3.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI3] AI3.
Identical to [AI2 Type] AI2t.

[AI3 min value] UIL3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI3] AI3, and
 [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 177).

[AI3 max value] UIH3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI3] AI3, and
 [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 178).

EAV64387 12/2019 179

Complete settings CSt-

[AI3 min. value] CrL3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI3] AI3, and
 [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 178).

[AI3 max. value] CrH3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI3] AI3, and
 [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 178).

[AI4 Type] AI4t

Configuration of analog input AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted, and
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI4] AI4.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc

[AI4 min value] UIL4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI4] AI4, and
 [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 177).

[AI4 max value] UIH4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI4] AI4, and
 [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 178).

[AI4 min. value] CrL4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI4] AI4, and
 [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 178).

180 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI4 max. value] CrH4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI4] AI4, and
 [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 178).

[AI5 Type] AI5t

Configuration of analog input AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted, and
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI5] AI5.

Identical to [AI4 Type] AI4t.

[AI5 min value] UIL5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI5] AI5, and
 [AI4 Type] AI5t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 177).

[AI5 max value] UIH5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI5] AI5, and
 [AI4 Type] AI5t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 178).

[AI5 min. value] CrL5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI5] AI5, and
 [AI5 Type] AI5t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 178).

[AI5 max. value] CrH5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI5] AI5, and
 [AI5 Type] AI5t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 178).

[Min PID feedback] PIF1

Minimum PID feedback.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
0...[Max PID feedback] PIF2 Setting range
Factory setting: 100

EAV64387 12/2019 181

Complete settings CSt-

[Max PID feedback] PIF2

Maximum PID feedback.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
[Min PID feedback] PIF1...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: 1,000

[PID feedback] rPF

Value for PID feedback, display only.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[Min Fbk Warning] PAL

Minimum feedback level warning (for [PID Low Fdbck Warn] PFAL warning).
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: 100

[Max Fbk Warning] PAH

Maximum feedback level warning (for [PID High Fdbck Warn] PFAH warning).
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: 1,000

182 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[PID Reference] rF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [PID controller] [PID Reference]

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

[Intern PID Ref] PII

Internal PID reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO The PID controller reference is given by [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1.
Factory setting
[Yes] YES The PID controller reference is internal via [Internal PID ref] rPI.

[Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1

Configuration reference frequency 1.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No, and
 [Intern PID Ref] PII is set to [No] NO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
[AI1] AI1 Analog input AI1
Factory Setting
[AI2]...[AI3] AI2...AI3 Analog input AI2...AI3
[AI Virtual 1] AIv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref.Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC Reference Frequency via remote terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been
Module] inserted
[DI5 PulseInput PI5...PI6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment]...[DI6
PulseInput
Assignment]

[Min PID reference] PIP1

Minimum PID reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
[Min PID feedback] PIF1...[Max PID Setting range
reference] PIP2 Factory setting: 150

EAV64387 12/2019 183

Complete settings CSt-

[Max PID reference] PIP2

Maximum PID reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
[Min PID reference] PIP1...[Max PID Setting range
feedback] PIF2 Factory setting: 900

[Internal PID ref] rPI

Internal PID reference.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No, and
 [Intern PID Ref] PII is set to [Yes] YES.

Setting Description
[Min PID reference] PIP1...[Max PID Setting range
reference] PIP2 Factory setting: 150

[Auto/Manual assign.] PAU

Auto/Manual select input.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration

184 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Manual PID Reference] PIM

Manual PID reference.
Reference input in manual mode.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] nO, and
 [Auto/Manual assign.] PAU is not set to [No] nO.

The preset speeds are active on the manual reference if they have been configured.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[PulseInput PI5...PI6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment On
DI5]...[PulseInput
Assignment On
DI6]

EAV64387 12/2019 185

Complete settings CSt-

[PID preset references] PrI- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [PID controller] [Reference frequency] [PID preset
references]

About This Menu

The function can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PIF is assigned.

[2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2

2 PID Preset assignment.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration

[4 PID Preset Assign] Pr4

4 PID Preset assignment.
Identical to [2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 (see page 186).
Verify that [2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 has been assigned before assigning this function.

[Ref PID Preset 2] rP2

Second PID preset reference.
This parameter can be accessed only if [2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 is assigned.

Setting Description
[Min PID reference] PIP1...[Max PID Setting range
reference] PIP2 Factory setting: 300

[Ref PID Preset 3] rP3

Third PID preset reference.
This parameter can be accessed only if [4 PID Preset Assign] Pr4 is assigned.

Setting Description
[Min PID reference] PIP1...[Max PID Setting range
reference] PIP2 Factory setting: 600

186 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Ref PID Preset 4] rP4

Fourth PID preset reference.
This parameter can be accessed only if [4 PID Preset Assign] Pr4 and [2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 are
assigned.

Setting Description
[Min PID reference] PIP1...[Max PID Setting range
reference] PIP2 Factory setting: 900

EAV64387 12/2019 187

Complete settings CSt-

[PID Reference] rF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [PID controller] [PID Reference]

[Predictive Speed Ref] FPI

Predictive speed reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref.Freq- LCC Reference frequency via remote terminal
Rmt.Term]
[Ref. Freq- Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
Modbus]
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via communication module
Module]
[PulseInput PI5...PI6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment On
DI5]...[PulseInput
Assignment On
DI6]

[Speed Input %] PSr

PID speed input % reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.

Setting Description
1...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

188 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Settings] St- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [PID controller] [Settings]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

[PID Prop.Gain] rPG

PID proportional gain.

Setting Description
0.01...100.00 Setting range
Factory setting: 1.00

[PI Intgl.Gain] rIG

Integral gain.

Setting Description
0.01...100.00 Setting range
Factory setting: 1.00

[PID derivative gain] rdG

Derivative gain.

Setting Description
0.00...100.00 Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00

[PID ramp] PrP

PID acceleration/deceleration ramp, defined to go from [Min PID reference] PIP1 to [Max PID reference]
PIP2 and conversely.

Setting Description
0.0...99.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 s

[PID Inversion] PIC

PID inversion.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Yes

[PID Min Output] POL

PID controller minimum output in Hz.

Setting Description
-500.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

EAV64387 12/2019 189

Complete settings CSt-

[PID Max Output] POH

PID controller maximum output in Hz.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 60.0 Hz

[PID Error Warning] PEr

PID error warning.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: 100

[PID Integral OFF] PIS

Integral shunt.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive (the PID integral is enabled).
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active (the PID integral is disabled).

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration

190 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[PID acceleration time] ACCP

PID: acceleration during start-up.
PID start ramp can be applied before starting the PID controller to allow reaching quickly the PID reference
without increasing PID gains.

Setting Description
0.01...99,99 s Setting range
Factory setting: 5.00 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 according to [Ramp increment] Inr

[PID Start Ref Freq] SFS

PID start reference frequency.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
If [PID Start Ref Freq] SFS is lower than [Low speed] LSP, this function
has no effect.
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

EAV64387 12/2019 191

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.13
[Generic functions] - [Sleep/wakeup] SPW- Menu

[Generic functions] - [Sleep/wakeup] SPW- Menu

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Sleep/Wakeup] SPW- Overview 193
[Sleep menu] SLP- Menu 197
[AI1 Sensor config.] SIF1- Menu 199
[AI2 Sensor config.] SIF2- Menu 201
[AI3 Sensor config.] SIF3- Menu 203
[AI4 Sensor config.] SIF4- Menu 204
[AI5 Sensor config.] SIF5- Menu 205
[DI5 Sensor Configuration] SIF8- Menu 206
[DI6 Sensor Configuration] SIF9- Menu 207
[AIV1 Sensor config.] SIV1- Menu 208
[Sleep menu] SLP- Menu 209
[Boost] Sbt- Menu 211
[Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu 212
[Wake up menu] wKP- Menu 215

192 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Sleep/Wakeup] SPW- Overview

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] nO.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

The purpose of the "Sleep / Wake-Up" function is to stop the motor in process standstill situations.
It allows you to save energy and helps to prevent premature aging of some equipment that cannot run for
a long time at low speed because the greasing or cooling depends on the machine speed.
In a pressure-controlled pumping application:
 The purpose of the Sleep / Wake-Up function is to manage periods of the application where the water
demand is low and where it is not needed to keep the main pumps running.
 It allows you to save energy in low demand periods. Then, when the demand is increasing, the
application needs to wake up in order to meet the demand.
 Optionally, during a sleep period, a Jockey pump can be started to maintain an emergency service
pressure or meet a low water demand.
Depending on user-defined wakeup conditions, the motor is restarted automatically.

EAV64387 12/2019 193

Complete settings CSt-

Sleep/Wake-Up in PID Control Mode

When the drive is used in PID control, one of the following conditions is used to switch the application to
the sleep state:
 Sleep on low speed(when all fixed pumps are Off in case of a multi-pump application).
 Sleep on low sleep sensor value (using flow sensor for monitoring).
 Sleep on low motor power (when all fixed pumps are Off in case of a multi-pump application).
 Sleep on external condition (using drive input).

The drive is in "PID control mode" when PID is active. Typically when:
 PID is configured, and
 Channel 1 is selected, and
 PID is in automatic mode.

When the drive is in a sleep state, a wake-up condition is used to restart the application:
 Wake-up on PID Feedback level
 Wake-up on PID Error level
 Wake-up on low-pressure condition

194 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Sleep Conditions in PID Control Mode

If there is no valid wake-up condition, then the system switches to the sleep mode after one of the
configured sleep conditions remains longer than [Sleep Delay] SLPd.
The sleep detection mode is selected by configuring [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM. Then the system
switches to sleep mode if the selected condition is met:

Configuration Condition
LF sleep on flow sensor value Sensor value is below the sleep level
SW sleep on switch or external The switch input becomes active
condition
SPd sleep on speed The output frequency is below the sleep speed
PWr sleep on power level The output power is below the sleep power
HP sleep on pressure sensor value Sensor value is higher than the sleep level
or multiple conditions At least 1 of the configured condition to enter in sleep mode is met

Wake-Up Conditions in PID Control Mode

The system wakes up according to [Wake Up Mode] WUPM configuration:
 On PID Feedback level
 On PID Error level.
 On low-pressure condition.

The system wakes up if the wake up conditions are valid for a time longer than the [Wake Up Delay]
WuPD.
If [Feedback] FbK is selected, then the system wakes up and goes back in PID control mode:
 When PID feedback drops below configured [Wake Up Process Level] WUPF if PID is configured in
Direct mode, ([PID Inversion] PIC is set to nO).
 When PID feedback raises above configured [Wake Up Process Level] WUPF, if PID is configured in
Reverse mode ([PID Inversion] PIC is set to yES).
If [Error] Err is selected, then the system wakes up and goes back in PID control mode:
 When PID feedback drops below ([PID reference] RPC - [Wake Up Process Error] WUPE), if PID is
configured in Direct mode ([PID Inversion] PIC is set to nO).
 When PID feedback raises above ([PID reference] RPC + [Wake Up Process Error] WUPE), if PID is
configured in Reverse mode ([PID Inversion] PIC is set to yES).
If [Pressure] LP is selected, then the system wakes up and goes back in PID control mode when the
pressure feedback drops below [Wake Up Process Level] WUPF.

Boosting Phase in PID Control Mode

When entering the sleep mode, the motor accelerates to [Sleep Boost Speed] SLbS during [Sleep Boost
Time] SLbt and then stops.
If [Sleep Boost Time] SLbt is set to 0, then the boost phase is ignored.

Initial State in PID Control Mode

Just after the system starts in automatic mode (a run order appears while in automatic mode - channel 1
already selected and PID auto):
 If a wake-up condition is met, the drive goes in PID control mode (PID started).
 If a wake-up condition is not met, the drive goes in sleep mode (PID stays stopped and motor is kept
halted), and Boosting phase is ignored.
When the control is switched to automatic mode while the motor is running (switch to channel 1 or switch
to PID auto mode for example), the drive stays in running state and switches to PID automatic mode.

Configuration of Sleep External Condition (Usage of a No Flow Switch for Example)

Sleep switch allows you to select the source of sleep external condition:
 nO: no input selected for the sleep external condition.
 dIx: the sleep external condition (switch for example) is connected to DIx (the assignment is also
possible on a control bit in I/O profile).

EAV64387 12/2019 195

Complete settings CSt-

Configuration of Sleep Sensor (Flow or Pressure Sensor)

The assignment of a sleep sensor, the configuration of the selected physical input and the configuration of
scaling to process value are performed.
A sleep sensor source is selected by [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A and [OutletPres Assign] PS2A which
allows to select the analog or pulse input on which the sensor is connected:
 nO: no input selected for sleep sensor value.
 AIx: sleep sensor is connected to AIx.
 AIUx: sleep sensor is connected to virtual AIUx.
 PIx: sleep sensor is connected to pulse input PIx.

The configuration of an analog input is performed.

The configuration of a pulse input is performed.
Depending on the selected source, the process range of the sensor is configured by:
 [AIx Lowest Process] AIxJ, [AIx Highest Process] AIxk (without unit), when connected on an
analog input.
 [AIv1 Lowest Process] AVIJ, [AIv1 Highest Process] AVIk (without unit), when using the virtual
analog input.
 [DIx PulseInput Low Freq] PILx, [DIx PulseInput High Freq] PIHx (without unit), when connected
on a pulse input configured in frequency.

196 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Sleep menu] SLP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Sleep/Wakeup] [Sleep menu]

About This Menu

[Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM

Sleep detection mode.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not configured
Factory setting
[Switch] SW System enters in sleep mode on switch condition
[Flow] LF System enters in sleep mode on low flow condition
[Speed] SPd System enters in sleep mode on speed condition
[Power] PWr System enters in sleep mode on power condition
[Pressure] HP System enters in sleep mode on high-pressure condition
[Multiple] Or System enters in sleep mode on multiple-OR condition

[Sleep Switch Assign] SLPW

Sleep switch assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Switch] Sw or [Multiple] Or.
Select an external condition to enter in sleep mode (for example, flow switch).

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[DI1 (Low L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
level)]...[DI6 (Low
level)]

EAV64387 12/2019 197

Complete settings CSt-

[Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A

Installation flow sensor assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Flow] LF, or [Multiple] or.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[AI Virtual 1] AIv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[Di5 PulseInput PI5...PI6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment]...[Di6
PulseInput
Assignment]

198 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI1 Sensor config.] SIF1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Sleep menu] [AI1 Sensor config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [AI1] AI1, and
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
 [Flow] LF, or
 [Multiple] or.

[AI1 Type] AI1t

Configuration of analog input AI1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
Factory setting
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA

[AI1 min value] UIL1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AI1 max value] UIH1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

[AI1 min. value] CrL1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] oA.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AI1 max. value] CrH1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] oA.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

EAV64387 12/2019 199

Complete settings CSt-

[AI1 Lowest Process] AI1J

AI1 lowest process.

Setting Description
-32,768...32,767 Setting range. Value in application customer unit.
Factory setting: 0

[AI1 Highest Process] AI1K

AI1 highest process.

Setting Description
-32,768...32,767 Setting range. Value in application customer unit.
Factory setting: 0

200 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI2 Sensor config.] SIF2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Sleep menu] [AI2 Sensor config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [AI2] AI2, and
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
 [Flow] LF, or
 [Multiple] or.

[AI2 Type] AI2t

Configuration of analog input AI2.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[KTY] KtY 1 KTY84
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[PT1000] 1Pt3 1 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[PT100] 1Pt2 1 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[3PT1000] 3Pt3 3 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[3PT100] 3Pt2 3 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No

[AI2 min value] UIL2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 199).

[AI2 max value] UIH2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 199).

[AI2 min. value] CrL2

AI2 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Current] oA.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 199) with factory setting: 0.4 mA.

[AI2 max. value] CrH2

AI2 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Current] oA.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 199).
EAV64387 12/2019 201
Complete settings CSt-

[AI2 Lowest Process] AI2J

AI2 lowest process.
Identical to [AI1 Lowest Process] AI1J (see page 200).

[AI2 Highest Process] AI2K

AI2 highest process.
Identical to [AI1 Highest Process] AI1K (see page 200).

202 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI3 Sensor config.] SIF3- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Sleep menu] [AI3 Sensor config.]

About this menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [AI3] AI3, and
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
 [Flow] LF, or
 [Multiple] or.

[AI3 Type] AI3t

Configuration of analog input AI3.
Identical to [AI2 Type] AI2t (see page 201).

[AI3 min value] UIL3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 199).

[AI3 max value] UIH3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 199).

[AI3 min. value] CrL3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if AI3t is set to [Current] oA.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 199).

[AI3 max. value] CrH3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if AI3t is set to [Current] oA.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 199).

[AI3 Lowest Process] AI3J

AI3 lowest process.
Identical to [AI1 Lowest Process] AI1J (see page 200).

[AI3 Highest Process] AI3K

AI3 highest process.
Identical to [AI1 Highest Process] AI1K (see page 200).

EAV64387 12/2019 203

Complete settings CSt-

[AI4 Sensor config.] SIF4- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Pump functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Sleep menu] [AI4 Sensor config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [AI4] AI4, and
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
 [Flow] LF, or
 [Multiple] or.

[AI4 Type] AI4t

Configuration of analog input AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc

[AI4 min value] UIL4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 199).

[AI4 max value] UIH4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 199).

[AI4 min. value] CrL4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 199).

[AI4 max. value] CrH4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 199).

[AI4 Lowest Process] AI4J

AI4 lowest process.
Identical to [AI1 Lowest Process] AI1J (see page 200).

[AI4 Highest Process] AI4K

AI4 highest process.
Identical to [AI1 Highest Process] AI1K (see page 200).

204 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI5 Sensor config.] SIF5- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Sleep menu] [AI5 Sensor config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [AI5] AI5, and
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
 [Flow] LF, or
 [Multiple] or.

[AI5 Type] AI5t

Configuration of analog input AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI4 Type] AI4t (see page 204).

[AI5 min value] UIL5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 199).

[AI5 max value] UIH5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 199).

[AI5 min. value] CrL5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 199).

[AI5 max. value] CrH5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 199).

[AI5 Lowest Process] AI5J

AI5 lowest process.
Identical to [AI1 Lowest Process] AI1J (see page 200).

[AI5 Highest Process] AI5K

AI5 highest process.
Identical to [AI1 Highest Process] AI1K (see page 200).

EAV64387 12/2019 205

Complete settings CSt-

[DI5 Sensor Configuration] SIF8- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Sleep menu] [DI5 Sensor
Configuration]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [DI5 PulseInput Assignment] PI5, and
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
 [Flow] LF, or
 [Multiple] or.

[DI5 PulseInput Low Freq] PIL5

DI5 pulse input low frequency.

Setting Description
0.00...30,000.00 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 Hz

[DI5 PulseInput High Freq] PIH5

DI5 pulse input high frequency.

Setting Description
0.00...30.00 kHz Setting range
Factory setting: 30.00 kHz

[DI5 Min Process] PI5J

Minimum process value for selected input.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[DI5 Max Process] PI5K

Maximum process value for selected input.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

206 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[DI6 Sensor Configuration] SIF9- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Sleep menu] [DI6 Sensor
Configuration]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI5 Sensor Configuration] SIF8- Menu (see page 206).
This menu can be accessed if:
 [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [DI6 PulseInput Assignment] PI6, and
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
 [Flow] LF, or
 [Multiple] or.

[DI6 PulseInput Low Freq] PIL6

DI6 pulse input low frequency.

[DI6 PulseInput High Freq] PIH6

DI6 pulse input high frequency.

[DI6 Min Process] PI6J

Minimum process value for selected input.

[DI6 Max Process] PI6K

Maximum process value for selected input.

EAV64387 12/2019 207

Complete settings CSt-

[AIV1 Sensor config.] SIV1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Pump functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Sleep menu] [AIV1 Sensor config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [AI Virtual 1] AIU1, and
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
 [Flow] LF, or
 [Multiple] or.

[AIV1 Channel Assignment] AIC1

Channel assignment for virtual analog input AIV1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been
Module] inserted

[AIV1 Lowest Process] AU1J

AI virtual x: minimum process value.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[AIV1 Highest Process] AU1K

AI virtual x: maximum process value.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

208 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Sleep menu] SLP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Sleep menu]

[Sleep Flow Level] SLnL

Sleep flow level.
Sensor level under which the system should enter the sleep mode (Zero value to deactivate).
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is not set to [Not Configured] nO, and
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
 [Flow] LF, or
 [Multiple] or.

Setting Description
[No] nO to 32,767 Setting range
Unit: [Flow rate unit] SuFr (for example, %, l/s; m3/h)
Factory setting: [No] nO

[OutletPres Assign] PS2A

Outlet pressure sensor assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Pressure] HP, or
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Multiple] or.

This parameter is forced to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
Factory setting

[Sleep Min Speed] SLSL

Sleep flow level.
Speed level under which the system should enter the sleep mode.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Speed] spd, or
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Multiple] or.

Setting Description
0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: [No] nO

[Sleep Power Level] SLPr

Sleep power level.
Power level under which the system should enter the sleep mode.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Power] pwr, or
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Multiple] or.

Setting Description
0...[Nominal Motor Power] nPr Setting range
Factory setting: [No] nO

EAV64387 12/2019 209

Complete settings CSt-

[Sleep Delay] SLPd

Sleep delay.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is not set to [Not Configured] nO.

Setting Description
0...3,600 s Setting range
Factory setting: 20 s

210 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Boost] Sbt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Sleep menu] [Boost]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed if [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is not set to [No] nO.

[Sleep Boost Speed] SLbS

Sleep boost speed.

Setting Description
0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: nO

[Sleep Boost Time] SLbt

Sleep boost time.

Setting Description
0...3,600 s Setting range
Factory setting: nO

EAV64387 12/2019 211

Complete settings CSt-

[Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Sleep menu] [Advanced sleep
check]

About This Menu

This function can be activated if:
 [Type of control] TOCT is set to [Pressure] PRESS and,
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is not set to [No] no.

212 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Sleep Mode] ASLM

Advanced sleep mode.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[YES] YES Yes

[Sleep Condition] ASLC

Advanced sleep verifies speed condition.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...[High Speed] HSP Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Sleep Delay] ASLd

Advanced sleep verifies delay.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...9,999 s Setting range
Factory setting: 20 s

EAV64387 12/2019 213

Complete settings CSt-

[Check Sleep Ref Spd] ASLr

Advanced sleep verifies speed reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...[High Speed] HSP Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

214 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Wake up menu] wKP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Sleep/wakeup] [Wake up menu]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is not set to [Not Configured] nO.

[Wake Up Mode] WUPM

Wake-up mode.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Feedback] FbK Wake-up on PID feedback level
Factory setting
[Error] Err Wake-up on PID error level
[Pressure] LP Wake-up on low-pressure condition

[Wake Up Process Level] WUPF

Wake-up process value level.
This parameter can be accessed if [Wake Up Mode] WUPM is set to [FeedBack] Fbk.

Setting Description
[Min PID feedback] PIF1...[Max PID Setting range
feedback] PIF2 Factory setting: 0

[Wake Up Process Error] WUPE

Wake-up process value error level.
This parameter can be accessed if [Wake Up Mode] WUPM is set to [Error] Err.

Setting Description
0...[Max PID feedback] PIF2 Setting range
Factory setting: 0,0 Hz

[OutletPres Assign] PS2A

Outlet pressure sensor assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Wake Up Mode] WUPM is set to [Pressure] LP.
This parameter is forced to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
Factory setting

[Wake Up Press Level] WUPL

Wake-up pressure level.
Pressure level over which the system should leave the sleep mode.
This parameter can be accessed if [Wake Up Mode] WUPM is set to [Pressure] LP.

Setting Description
[No] no to 32,767 Setting range
Unit: [P sensor unit] SuPr (for example, Pa, Bar, PSI, %)
Factory setting: [No] no

EAV64387 12/2019 215

Complete settings CSt-

[Wake Up Delay] WuPD

Wake-up delay.

Setting Description
0...3,600 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0 s

216 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.14
[Generic functions] - [Threshold reached]

[Generic functions] - [Threshold reached]

[Threshold reached] tHrE- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Threshold reached]

[Low I Threshold] CtdL

Current low threshold value (for [Low Current Reached] CTAL warning).

Setting Description
0...1.5 in Setting range
Factory setting: 0.2 A

[High Current Thd] Ctd

Current high threshold value (for [Current Thd Reached] CTA warning).

Setting Description
0...1.5 in Setting range
Factory setting: Drive nominal current

[Low Freq. Threshold] FtdL

Motor low frequency threshold (for [Mot Freq Low Thd] FTAL warning).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Motor Freq Thd] Ftd

Motor frequency threshold (for [Mot Freq High Thd] FTA warning).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 50.0 Hz

[2 Freq. Threshold] F2dL

Motor low frequency second threshold (for [Mot Freq Low Thd 2] F2AL warning).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Freq. threshold 2] F2d

Motor frequency threshold 2 (for [Mot Freq High Thd 2] F2A warning).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 50.0 Hz

EAV64387 12/2019 217

Complete settings CSt-

[Motor Thermal Thd] ttd

Motor thermal state threshold (for [Motor Therm Thd reached] TSA warning).

Setting Description

0...118% Setting range

Factory setting: 100%

[Reference high Thd] rtd

Reference frequency high threshold (for [Ref Freq High Thd reached] RTAH warning).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Reference low Thd] rtdL

Reference frequency low threshold (for [Ref Freq Low Thd reached] RTAL warning).

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

218 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.15
[Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command]

[Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command]

[Mains contactor command] LLC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Mains contactor command]

About This Menu

The line contactor closes every time a run command (forward or reverse) is sent and opens after every
stop, as soon as the drive is locked. For example, if the stop mode is stop on ramp, the contactor opens
when the motor reaches zero speed.
NOTE: The drive control power supply must be provided via an external 24 Vdc source.

NOTICE
DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Do not use this function at intervals of less than 60 s.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Example circuit (24 Vdc power supply):

DI• = Run command [Forward] Frd or [Reverse] rrS

R•A/R•C = [Mains Contactor] LLC
DIn = [Drive Lock] LES
NOTE: The Run/Reset key must be pressed once the emergency stop key has been released.

EAV64387 12/2019 219

Complete settings CSt-

[Mains Contactor] LLC

Mains contactor control.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[R1]...[R3] r1...r3 Relay output R1...R3
[R4]...[R6] r4...r6 Relay output R4...R6 if VW3A3204 relay output option module has been
inserted
[DQ11 Digital dO11...dO12 Digital output DQ11...DQ12 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
Output]...[DQ12 inserted
Digital Output]

[Drive Lock] LES

Drive lock assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Mains Contactor] LLC is not set to [No] No.
The drive locks when the assigned input or bit changes to 0.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[DI1 (Low L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
level)]...[DI6 (Low
level)]
[DI11 (Low L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if VW3A3203 I/O extension
level)]...[DI16 (Low module has been inserted
level)]

[Mains V. time out] LCt

Monitoring time for closing of line contactor.

Setting Description
1...999 s Setting range
Factory setting: 5 s

220 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.16
[Generic functions] - [Parameters switching]

[Generic functions] - [Parameters switching]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Parameters switching] MLP- Menu 222
[Set 1] PS1- Menu 224
[Set 2] PS2- Menu 224
[Set 3] PS3- Menu 224

EAV64387 12/2019 221

Complete settings CSt-

[Parameters switching] MLP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Parameters switching]

About This Menu

A set of 1 to 15 parameters from the [Parameter Selection] SPS list (see page 223) can be selected and
2 or 3 different values assigned. These 2 or 3 sets of values can then be switched using 1 or 2 digital inputs
or control word bits. This switching can be performed during operation (motor running). It can also be
controlled based on 1 or 2 frequency thresholds, whereby each threshold acts as a digital input (0 =
threshold not reached, 1 = threshold reached).

Values 1 Values 2 Values 3

Parameter 1 Parameter 1 Parameter 1 Parameter 1
... ... ... ...
Parameter 15 Parameter 15 Parameter 15 Parameter 15
Input DI or bit or frequency 0 1 0 or 1
threshold 2 values
Input DI or bit or frequency 0 0 1
threshold 3 values

NOTE: Do not modify the parameters in [Parameter Selection] SPS (see page 223), because any
modifications made in this menu will be lost on the next power-up. The parameters can be adjusted during
operation in the [Parameters switching]MLP- menu, on the active configuration.

[2 Parameter sets] CHA1

Parameter switching assignment 1.
Switching 2 parameter sets.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[Mot Freq High FtA Motor frequency high threshold reached
Thd]
[2nd Freq Thd F2A Second frequency threshold reached
Reached]
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration

[3 Parameter sets] CHA2

Parameter switching assignment 2.
Identical to [2 Parameter sets] CHA1.
Switching 3 parameter sets.
NOTE: In order to obtain 3 parameter sets, it is necessary to configure first [2 Parameter sets] CHA1.

222 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Parameter Selection] SPS

This parameter can be accessed if [2 Parameter sets] CHA1 is not set to [No] nO.
Making an entry in this parameter opens a window containing all the adjustment parameters that can be
accessed. Select 1 to 15 parameters using OK key. Parameter(s) can also be deselected using OK key.
Available parameters for parameters switching function are:

Parameter Code
[Ramp increment] Inr
[Acceleration] ACC
[Deceleration] dEC
[Acceleration 2] AC2
[Deceleration 2] dE2
[Begin Acc round] tA1
[End Acc round] tA2
[Begin Dec round] tA3
[End Dec round] tA4
[Low Speed] LSP
[High Speed] HSP
[Motor Th Current] ItH
[IR compensation] UFr
[Ramp Divider] dCF
[DC Inj Level 1] IdC
[DC Inj Time 1] tdI
[DC Inj Level 2] IdC2
[DC Inj Time 2] tdC
[Auto DC inj Level 1] SdC1
[Auto DC Inj Time 1] tdC1
[Auto DC inj Level 2] SdC2
[Auto DC Inj Time 2] tdC2
[Switching frequency] SFr
[Current Limitation] CLI
[Low Speed Timeout] tLS
[Preset speed 2]...[Preset speed 16] SP2... SP16
[Ref PID Preset 2] rP2
[Ref PID Preset 3] rP3
[Freq. threshold 2] F2d
[2 Freq. Threshold] F2dL
[Skip Frequency] JPF
[Skip Frequency 2] JF2
[3rd Skip Frequency] JF3
[Skip Freq.Hysteresis] JFH

EAV64387 12/2019 223

Complete settings CSt-

[Set 1] PS1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Parameters switching] [Set 1]

About This Menu

Making an entry in this menu opens a settings window containing the selected parameters in the order in
which they were selected.

[Set 2] PS2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Parameters switching] [Set 2]

About This Menu

Identical to [Set 1] PS1- (see page 224).

[Set 3] PS3- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Parameters switching] [Set 3]

About This Menu

Identical to [Set 1] PS1- (see page 224).

224 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.17
[Generic functions] - [Stop after speed timeout]

[Generic functions] - [Stop after speed timeout]

[Stop after speed timeout] PrSP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Stop after speed timeout]

Sleep/Wake-Up in Speed Control Mode

The drive is in Speed control mode, when PID is not active, typically when:
 PID is not configured (the motor speed setpoint is controlled by an external PLC, for example).
 PID is in manual mode (manual application mode, for example).
 PID is not active because Channel 1 is not selected (forced local mode enabled, for example).

When the drive is used in Speed Control (PID not used or not active), a speed condition is used to switch
the application to the sleep state. When the drive is in sleep state, the motor is restarted if the sleep
condition disappears.
This function avoids prolonged operation at low speeds when neither useful nor compliant with the system
constraints. It stops the motor after a period of operation at reduced speed. This time and speed can be
adjusted.
In Speed control mode, Sleep/Wake-up is managed according to the following rules:
 The motor is stopped when [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH and [Output frequency] rFr become and stay
lower than [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE during [Low Speed Timeout] tLS.
 The motor is restarted when [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH > [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.]
SLE.

1 Nominal [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function action: after [Low Speed Timeout] tLS time, the motor is stopped
according to the current deceleration ramp
2 [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH becomes greater than [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE and run order
still present [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is deactivated
3 [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is not activated because [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH becomes greater than
[Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE before [Low Speed Timeout] tLS has expired
4 [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is not activated because [Output frequency] rFr becomes greater than [Low
speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE before [Low Speed Timeout] tLS has expired
5 [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is not activated because [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH stays greater than [Low
speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE

EAV64387 12/2019 225

Complete settings CSt-

[Low Speed Timeout] tLS

Low speed timeout

Setting Description
0.0...999.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 s

[Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE

Sleep offset threshold.
This parameter can be accessed if [Low Speed Timeout] tLS is not set to 0.
Adjustable restart threshold (offset) following a stop after prolonged operation at [Low speed] LSP +
[Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE, in Hz. The motor restarts if the reference rises above (LSP + SLE) and if a run
command is still present.

Setting Description
1.0...[Max Frequency] tFr Setting range
Factory setting: 1.0 Hz

226 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.18
[Generic functions] - [Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu

[Generic functions] - [Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu

[Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Advanced sleep check]

About This Menu

This function can be activated if:
 [Type of control] tOCt is set to [Pressure] PrESS and,
 [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is not set to [No] no.

EAV64387 12/2019 227

Complete settings CSt-

[Sleep Mode] ASLM

Advanced sleep mode.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[YES] YES Yes

[Sleep Condition] ASLC

Advanced sleep verifies speed condition.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...[High Speed] HSP Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Sleep Delay] ASLd

Advanced sleep verifies delay.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...9,999 s Setting range
Factory setting: 20 s

228 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Check Sleep Ref Spd] ASLr

Advanced sleep verifies speed reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

EAV64387 12/2019 229

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.19
[Generic functions] - [Booster control]

[Generic functions] - [Booster control]

Introduction
The aim of the booster control function is to maintain the desired pressure or flow at the outlet of the pumps
according to the demand by:
 Managing the velocity of the variable speed pump connected to the drive.
 Staging/De-staging the auxiliary fixed speed pumps.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[System Architecture] mpq- Menu 231
[Pumps configuration] pump- Menu 235
[System Architecture] mpq- Menu 238
[Booster control] bsC- Menu 239
[Stage/Destage condition] sdCm- Menu 240
[Booster control] bsC- Menu 241

230 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[System Architecture] mpq- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Booster control] [System architecture]

About This Menu

This menu is used to define the equipment architecture.
The architecture is chosen by setting [Pump System Archi] MPSA to [Single Drive] UndOL: one
variable speed pump and up to five fixed speed pumps.
In single drive architecture, the total number of pumps is set with [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn:
 With lead pump alternation, using interlocked switching relays for all pumps to connect them on mains
or on the drive.
 Without lead pump alternation, using digital outputs to command the auxiliary pumps (with soft starters
for example). The lead pump is always connected to the drive.
In multiple drives architecture, the number of pumps is set with [Nb of Devices] MPGN. Lead pump
alternation is not possible in this case.

Pump Cycling Mode

This functionality allows changing the start order of all available pumps in order to manage their wear.
There are several ways to perform the pump cycling strategy by setting [Pump Cycling Mode] MPPC:
 Cycling based on pump order:
 [FIFO] FIFO mode: pumps are started and stopped in ascending order
 [LIFO] LIFO mode: pumps are started in ascending order while they are stopped in descending
order
 Cycling based on running time:
 [Runtime] rtIME: the available pump with the lowest running time is started first and the running
pump with the highest running time is stopped first.

Lead Pump Alternation

The lead pump alternation function allows permuting the available pumps in order that each pump can
become the lead pump (variable speed pump) instead of an auxiliary pump (fixed speed pump).
The lead pump is the first pump to be started and the last pump to be stopped. It is always associated to
the variable speed drive.
The function can be activated by setting [Lead Pump Alternation] MPLA:
 [No] nO: no lead pump alternation, the pump 1 is always the lead pump. The pump cycling is applied
only on auxiliary pumps.
 [Stage] StAGE: The lead pump is permuted between all available pumps at each stage. In this mode
a pump cycling strategy is followed to stage or destage a pump.
 When the needed pressure exceeds the already running pumps capability, the next pump is staged
as lead pump and previous pumps becomes fixed speed pumps.
 The time delay needed to switch between pumps can be adjust using [Altern Wait Time] MPAT.
 When the needed pressure becomes lower than the lead pump capability, the fixed speed pumps are
destaged following the [Pump Cycling Mode] MPPC
When lead pump alternation is activated, catch on fly function should be configured to reduce over current
when a pump is started as the lead pump while it was running as auxiliary pump before. It is also possible
to set [Pump Ready Delay] MPId to delay the availability of an auxiliary pump for a new start after it has
been stopped.

Automatic Period Cycling

This function is used to balance the duty sharing of all the pumps of the MultiPump architecture.
It forces the pump alternation based on the time defined by [Pump Auto Cycling] MPCP. The goal is to
extend the life time of each pump.

EAV64387 12/2019 231

Complete settings CSt-

Display Parameters
A set of parameters to display the system is available in [Application Parameters] APR-, [Variable Speed
Pump] MPP-:
 The quantity of pumps available [Available Pumps] MPAn and the quantity of pump already staged
[Nb of Staged Pumps] MPSn.
 The number of the pump selected to be the lead pump [Lead Pump] PLId.
 The number of the next pump to be staged [Next Staged Pump] PntS and de-staged [Next Destaged
Pump] Pntd.
 For each pump (pump 1 in the example):
 The state [Pump 1 State] P1S
 The type [Pump 1 Type] P1t
 The cumulated run time [Pump 1 Runtime] P1Ot
 The cumulated number of starts [Pump 1 Nb Starts] P1nS

Example of Architecture Without Lead Pump Alternation and Two Fixed Speed Pumps

Pump 2 and pump 3 are controlled by relay outputs R2 and R3.

The state of each pump is provided to the drive via digital inputs DI2 and DI3:
 1 = the pump is ready to operate.
 0 = the pump is not available.

KM1 is switched ON when CP1 is activated. CP1 is controlled via the relay output R2.
KM2 is switched ON when CP2 is activated. CP2 is controlled via the relay output R3.
Q1 and Q2 must be switched ON to have both pump 2 and pump 3 ready to operate.

232 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Example of Architecture with Lead Pump Alternation on Three Pumps

Each pump is controlled by a relay output:

 Pump 1 control via relay output R2.
 Pump 2 control via relay output R3.
 Pump 3 control via relay output R4.

The state of each pump is provided to the drive via digital inputs DI2, DI3, and DI4:
 1 = the pump is ready to operate.
 0 = the pump is not available.

If the relay output R2 is the first activated, the pump 1 becomes the lead pump. CP1 is switched ON via
relay output R2, KD1 is switched ON and the pump 1 is connected to the drive.
The other pumps cannot be connected to the drive thanks to KD1 (switched OFF) which prevent KD2 and
KD3 to be activated when CP2 and CP3 are switched ON. The other pumps become auxiliary pumps and
they are connected to the supply mains trough KM2 and KM3 which are activated when, respectively, CP2
and CP3 are switched ON, that is, when R3 and R4 are activated.
When relay output R3 is the first activated, the pump 2 becomes the lead pump. The other pumps become
auxiliary pumps which are connected to the supply mains via KM1 and KM3.
When relay output R4 is the first activated, the pump 3 becomes the lead pump. The other pumps become
auxiliary pumps which are connected to the supply mains via KM1 and KM2.
Q1, Q2, and Q3 must be switched ON to have all pumps ready to operate.
To change the lead pump, it is necessary to deactivate all relay outputs which means that all pumps must
be already stopped. It is then possible to decide which relay output to be activated first and so defining the
new lead pump.

EAV64387 12/2019 233

Complete settings CSt-

[Pump System Archi] mpsa

Pump system architecture selection.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Mono-Pump] no Multi-pump control deactivated
Factory setting
[Single Drive] vndol Single drive with or without auxiliary pumps

[Nb Of Pumps] mppn

Number of pumps.
This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Archi] mpsa is set to [Single Drive] vndol.

Setting Description
1...6 Setting range
Factory setting: 1

234 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Pumps configuration] pump- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Booster control] [System architecture] [Pumps
configuration]

Input and Output Configuration for Each Pump

For each pump (pump 1 in the example), it is possible to set:
 The drive digital output for the command: [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] MPO1 if [Lead Pump Alternation]
mpLa is not set to [No] no.
 The drive digital input for the pump availability information: [Pump 1 Ready Assign] MPI1. If not
configured, the pump is considered as always available.
An internal configurable delay [Pump Ready Delay] MPId is available. When the digital input assigned
to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] MPI1 switches to the active state or after de-staging, the related pump is
considered as not available during [Pump Ready Delay] MPId.
This is used to wait that the auxiliary pumps are stopped and that all contactors between the drive and the
motor (if existing) are closed before staging.

Warnings and Errors Handling

If the available capacity of the system is exceeded:
 [MultiPump Capacity Warn] MPCA warning is active if the number of pumps to be started is higher
than the number of available pumps.
NOTE: If the number of available pump is equal to 0, the warning is active.
If the selected lead pump is not available:
 A [Lead Pump Warn] MPLA warning is active if the lead pump becomes not available while in run or
if there is no lead pump available at run command.
 A [Lead Pump Error] MPLF error is active if the lead pump becomes not available while in run. If
configured, the delay [Pump Ready Delay] MPId is applied on the error triggering if there is no lead
pump available at run command.
This error is handled whatever the active command channel if booster control or level control function
is configured.
The drive response to a [Lead Pump Error] MPLF is set with [MultiPump ErrorResp] MPFb parameter.

[Pump 1 Cmd Assign] mpo1

Command assignment for pump 1.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Pump System Archi] MPSA is set to [Multi Drives] NVSD or [Multi Masters] NVSDR or,
 [Pump System Archi] MPSA is set to [Single Drive] VNDOL and [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [1]
1 or above.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [1] 1 or above.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[R1]...[R3] r1...r3 Relay output R1...R3
[R4]...[R6] r4...r6 Relay output R4...R6 if VW3A3204 relay output option module has been
inserted
[DQ11 Digital dO11...dO12 Digital output DQ11...DQ12 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
Output]...[DQ12 inserted
Digital Output]

EAV64387 12/2019 235

Complete settings CSt-

[Pump 1 Ready Assign] mpi1

Pump 1 ready to operate assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [1] 1 or above.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[DI1 (Low L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
level)]...[DI6 (Low
level)]

[Pump 2 Cmd Assign] mpo2

Command assignment for pump 2.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [2] 2 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] mpo1 (see page 235).

[Pump 2 Ready Assign] mpi2

Pump 2 ready to operate assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [2] 2 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] mpi1 (see page 236).

[Pump 3 Cmd Assign] mpo3

Command assignment for pump 3.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [3] 3 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] mpo1 (see page 235).

[Pump 3 Ready Assign] mpi3

Pump 3 ready to operate assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [3] 3 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] mpi1 (see page 236).

[Pump 4 Cmd Assign] mpo4

Command assignment for pump 4.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [4] 4 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] mpo1 (see page 235).

236 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Pump 4 Ready Assign] mpi4

Pump 4 ready to operate assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [4] 4 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] mpi1 (see page 236).

[Pump 5 Cmd Assign] mpo5

Command assignment for pump 5.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [5] 5 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] mpo1 (see page 235).

[Pump 5 Ready Assign] mpi5

Pump 5 ready to operate assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [5] 5 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] mpi1 (see page 236).

[Pump 6 Cmd Assign] mpo6

Command assignment for pump 6.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [6] 6 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] mpo1 (see page 235).

[Pump 6 Ready Assign] mpi6

Pump 6 ready to operate assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] mppn is set to [6] 6 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] mpi1 (see page 236).

EAV64387 12/2019 237

Complete settings CSt-

[System Architecture] mpq- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Booster control] [System architecture]

[Pump Cycling Mode] mppC

Pump cycling mode.

Setting Code / Value Description

[FIFO] fifo First in first out
[LIFO] lifo Last in first out
Factory setting
[Runtime] rtime Pump runtime

[Lead Pump Alternation] mpla

Lead pump alternation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Archi] mpsa is set to [Single Drive] Vndol
NOTE: If [Lead Pump Alternation] MPLA is not set to [No] NO, the [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] mpo1 and
[Pump 1 Ready Assign] mpi1 have to be configured.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Deactivated
Factory setting
[Stage] StAGE Lead pump permutation at each stage

[Altern Wait Time] MPAT

Alternation wait time.

Setting Description
0...999 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 500 ms

[Pump Auto Cycling] MPCP

Pump auto cycling.
This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Architecture] MPSA is set to [Single Drive] VNDOL.

Setting Description
0.0...24.0 h Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 h

[Pump Ready Delay] mpid

Pump ready delay.
It corresponds to the stop time of the pumps. The pumps are considered as in running state and can not
be staged during this delay, whatever the active command channel.

Setting Description
0...3600 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0 s

238 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[MultiPump ErrorResp] mpfb

Response to multipump error.
This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Archi] mpsa is set to [Single Drive] Vndol

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp

[Booster control] bsC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Booster control] [Booster control]

About This Menu

This menu is used to set the booster control parameters.

[Booster Control] bCm

Booster control activation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Booster control function disabled
Factory setting
[Yes] yes Booster control function enabled

EAV64387 12/2019 239

Complete settings CSt-

[Stage/Destage condition] sdCm- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Booster control] [Booster control] [Stage/Destage
condition]

Staging/Destaging on Pressure Feedback Condition

 The working area [Booster Working Range] bCWA is expressed in a % of the reference value for the
pressure.
 Staging occurs if PID error (taking into account [PID Inversion] PIC) stays below the working area
while PID controller is at high limit speed for longer than [Booster Stg Delay] bSd.
High limit speed corresponds to limitation speed of PID (minimum between [High Speed] HSP & [PID
Max Output] POH).
 De-staging occurs if PID error (taking into account [PID Inversion] PIC) stays above working area
while PID controller is at low limit speed, for longer than [Booster Dstg Delay] bdd.
Low limit speed corresponds to speed at which PID controller has no effect (maximum between [Low
Speed] LSP & [PID Min Output] POL).

Staging/Destaging on Override
The override area is used whatever the configuration of the system and the strategy used.If the pressure
feedback is out of the [Booster Override Range] bCOA range, expressed in % of the reference value for
the pressure, a staging/de-staging is immediate. This increases the reactivity of the system in case of an
important and rapid variation of the demand. It allows suppressing the staging/de-staging delay.

[Booster Working Range] bCwa

Booster working area in % of the reference value for the pressure.

Setting Description
1.0...100.0% Setting range in % of the reference value for the pressure
Factory setting: 2.0%

[Booster Stg Delay] bsd

Booster stage delay.

Setting Description
0.0...999.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 s

[Booster Dstg Delay] bdd

Booster de-stage delay.

Setting Description
0.0...999.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 s

[Booster Override Range] bCoa

Booster override range.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Booster override range disabled
Factory setting
0.1...100.0% Setting range

240 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Booster control] bsC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Booster control] [Booster control]

[Booster S/D Interval] bsdt

Booster stage/de-stage time interval.

Setting Description
0.0...999.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 15.0 s

EAV64387 12/2019 241

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.20
[Generic monitoring]

[Generic monitoring]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Stall monitoring] StPr- Menu 243
[Therm sensor monit] MtSP- Menu 244

242 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Stall monitoring] StPr- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic monitoring] [Stall monitoring]

About This Menu

This function helps to prevent a motor overload by monitoring the motor current and the speed rise time.
A stalling condition is when:
 An output frequency is smaller than the stalling frequency [Stall Frequency] StP3
 And an output current is higher than the stalling current [Stall Current] StP2
 During a time longer than the stalling time [Stall Max Time] StP1

When a stalling condition occurs, a [Motor Stall Error] StF error is triggered.

[Stall Monitoring] StPC

Stall monitoring activation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function disabled
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Function enabled

[Stall Max Time] StP1

Motor stall maximum time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Stall Monitoring] StPC is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.0...200 s Setting range
Factory setting: 60.0 s

[Stall Current] StP2

Stall monitoring current level, as a % of the rated motor current [Nom Motor Current] NCR.
This parameter can be accessed if [Stall Monitoring] StPC is not set to [No] nO.
The factory setting changes to 150.0 % if [Dual rating] DRT is set to [Heavy Duty] High.
The setting range changes to 0.0...150.0 % if [Dual rating] DRT is set to [Heavy Duty] High.

Setting Description
0.0...120.0% Setting range
Factory setting: 110.0%

[Stall Frequency] StP3

Stall monitoring frequency level.
This parameter can be accessed if [Stall Monitoring] StPC is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

EAV64387 12/2019 243

Complete settings CSt-

[Therm sensor monit] MtSP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic monitoring] [Therm sensor monit]

About This Menu

The thermal monitoring function helps to prevent against high temperature by monitoring the real
temperature by the drive.
PTC, PT100, PT1000, and KTY84 thermal probes are supported by this function.
The function gives the possibility to manage 2 levels of monitoring:
 A Warning level: the drive triggers an event without stopping the application.
 An Error level: the drive triggers an event and stops the application.

The thermal probe is monitored for the following detected error:

 Overheating
 Probe break (loss of signal)
 Probe short-circuit

Activation
[AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS allows you to activate the thermal monitoring on the related analog input:
 [No] nO: the function is disabled
 [Yes] yES: the thermal monitoring is enabled on the related AIx.

Type of Thermal Probe Selection

[AIx Type] AIxt allows you to select the type of thermal sensor(s) connected on the related analog
input:
 [No] nO: no sensor
 [PTC Management] ptc: one to six PTC (in serial) is used
 [KTY] KtY: 1 KTY84 is used
 [PT100] 1Pt2: 1 PT100 connected with two wires is used
 [PT1000] 1Pt3: 1 PT1000 connected with two wires is used
 [PT100 in 3 wires] 1Pt23: 1 PT100 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5 only)
 [PT1000 in 3 wires] 1Pt33: 1 PT1000 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5 only)
 [3 PT100] 3Pt2: 3 PT100 connected with two wires is used
 [3 PT1000] 3Pt3: 3 PT1000 connected with two wires is used
 [3 PT100 in 3 wires] 3Pt23: 3 PT100 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5 only)
 [3 PT1000 in 3 wires] 3Pt33: 3 PT1000 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5 only)

2-wire thermal probes are supported on analog input 2 to analog input 5.

3-wire thermal probes are supported on analog input 4 and analog input 5. These inputs are available with
the I/O extension option module.
If the probe is far from the drive, the 3-wire connection is recommended as compared to a 2-wire
connection.
NOTE: In case of 3 serial probes, the drive monitors the average probe values.

244 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Wiring for PT100 and PT1000 Probes

For 2-wire probes, the following wirings are possible:

For 3-wire probes, the following wirings are possible:

[AI2 Th Monitoring] tH2S

Activation of the thermal monitoring on AI2.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[YES] YES Yes

[AI2 Type] AI2t

AI2 assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Th Monitoring] tH2S is not set to [No] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[KTY] KtY 1 KTY84
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[PT1000] 1Pt3 1 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[PT100] 1Pt2 1 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[3PT1000] 3Pt3 3 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No
[3PT100] 3Pt2 3 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS is not set to
[No] No

EAV64387 12/2019 245

Complete settings CSt-

[AI2 Th Error Resp] tH2b

Thermal monitoring response to a detected error for AI2.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is not set to
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

[AI2 Th Error Level] tH2F

Error detection level for AI2.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 110.0°C

[AI2 Th Warn Level] tH2A

Warning level for AI2.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 90.0°C

[AI2 Th Value] tH2v

AI2 thermal value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description
-15.0...200.0°C Setting range
Factory setting: _

246 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI3 Th Monitoring] tH3S

Activation of the thermal monitoring on AI3.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[YES] YES Yes

[AI3 Type] AI3t

AI3 assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Th Monitoring] tH3S is not set to [No] no.
Identical to [AI2 Type] AI2t (see page 245).

[AI3 Th Error Resp] tH3b

Thermal monitoring response to a detected error for AI3.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

[AI3 Th Error Level] tH3F

Error detection level for AI3.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 110.0°C

[AI3 Th Warn Level] tH3A

Warning level for AI3.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 90.0°C

EAV64387 12/2019 247

Complete settings CSt-

[AI3 Th Value] tH3v

AI3 thermal value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description
-15.0...200.0°C Setting range
Factory setting: _

[AI4 Th Monitoring] tH4S

Activation of the thermal monitoring on AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[YES] YES Yes

[AI4 Th Error Resp] tH4b

Thermal monitoring response to a detected error for AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] Ai4t is not set to
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

[AI4 Th Error Level] tH4F

Error detection level for AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] Ai4t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 110.0°C

248 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI4 Th Warn Level] tH4A

Warning level for AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] Ai4t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 90.0°C

[AI4 Th Value] tH4v

AI4 thermal value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] Ai4t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description
-15.0...200.0°C Setting range
Factory setting: _

[AI5 Th Monitoring] tH5S

Activation of the thermal monitoring on AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[YES] YES Yes

[AI5 Th Error Resp] tH5b

Thermal monitoring response to a detected error for AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] Ai5t is not set to
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

EAV64387 12/2019 249

Complete settings CSt-

[AI5 Th Error Level] tH5F

Error detection level for AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] Ai5t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 110.0°C

[AI5 Th Warn Level] tH5A

Warning level for AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] Ai5t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 90.0°C

[AI5 Th Value] tH5v

AI5 thermal value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] Ai5t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description
-15.0...200.0°C Setting range
Factory setting: _

250 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.21
[Error/Warning handling]

[Error/Warning handling]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Fault reset] rSt- Menu 252
[Auto fault reset] Atr- Menu 254
[Catch on the fly] FLr- Menu 255
[Motor thermal monit] tHt- Menu 256
[Output phase loss] OPL- Menu 258
[Input phase loss] IPL- Menu 258
[External error] EtF- Menu 259
[Undervoltage handling] USb- Menu 260
[Ground Fault] GrFL- Menu 262
[4-20mA loss] LFL- Menu 263
[Fallback Speed] LFF- Menu 264
[Error detection disable] InH- Menu 265
[Fieldbus monitoring] CLL- Menu 266
[Communication module] COMO- Menu 267
[Error/Warning handling] CSWM- Menu 268
[Process underload] ULd- Menu 269
[Process overload] OLd- Menu 271
[Warn grp 1 definition] A1C- Menu 273
[Warn grp 2 definition] A2C- Menu 273
[Warn grp 3 definition] A3C- Menu 273
[Warn grp 4 definition] A4C- Menu 273
[Warn grp 5 definition] A5C- Menu 273

EAV64387 12/2019 251

Complete settings CSt-

[Fault reset] rSt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Fault reset]

[Fault Reset Assign] rSF

Fault reset input assignment.
Detected errors are cleared manually when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 if the cause of the
detected error has been removed.
All errors cannot be cleared via a Fault Reset. Refer to the table in the part Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting to have the full list (see page 307).
The STOP/RESET key on the Plain Text Display Terminal performs the same function.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
Factory setting: [DI4] Li4. The setting of this parameter may be modified
depending on [Macro Config] CFG (see page 38)
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration

252 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Prod Restart Assign] rPA

Product restart assignment.
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and then restarts the drive. During this Restart procedure, the
drive goes through the same steps as if it had been switched off and on again. Depending on the wiring
and the configuration of the drive, this may result in immediate and unanticipated operation. The Restart
function can be assigned to a digital input

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and restarts the drive
 Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr mode.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted

[Product Restart] rP
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and then restarts the drive. During this Restart procedure, the
drive goes through the same steps as if it had been switched off and on again. Depending on the wiring
and the configuration of the drive, this may result in immediate and unanticipated operation.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and restarts the drive
 Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Product restart.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr mode.
This parameter can be used to reset all detected errors without having to disconnect the drive from the
supply mains.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Reinitialization. Press and hold down the OK key for 2 s. The parameter
changes back to [No] nO automatically as soon as the operation is
complete. The drive can only be reinitialized when locked.

EAV64387 12/2019 253

Complete settings CSt-

[Auto fault reset] Atr- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Auto fault reset]

[Auto Fault Reset] Atr

Automatic fault reset.
This function can be used to automatically perform individual or multiple Fault Resets. If the cause of the
error that has triggered the transition to the operating state Fault disappears while this function is active,
the drive resumes normal operation. While the Fault Reset attempts are performed automatically, the
output signal [Operating state Fault] is not available. If the attempts to perform the Fault Reset are not
successful, the drive remains in the operating state Fault and the output signal [Operating state Fault]
becomes active.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
 Verify that the fact that the output signal "Operating state Fault" is not available while this function is
active does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

The drive fault relay remains activated if this function is active. The speed reference and the operating
direction must be maintained.
It is recommended to use 2-wire control ([2/3-wire control] tCC is set to [2 wire] 2C and [2-wire type]
tCt is set to [Level] LEL, refer to [2/3-wire control] tCC.
If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time [Fault Reset Time] tAr has elapsed, the
procedure is aborted and the response to external error. remains locked until it is turned off and then on
again.
The detected error codes, which permit this function, are listed in the Diagnostics part of the manual.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Automatic restart, after locking in error state, if the detected error has
disappeared and the other operating conditions permit the restart. The
restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by
increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then 1 minute for the
following attempts.

[Fault Reset Time] tAr

Maximum time for automatic restart function.
This parameter appears if [Auto Fault Reset] Atr is set to [Yes] YES. It can be used to limit the number
of consecutive restarts on a recurrent detected error.

Setting Code / Value Description

[5 minutes] 5 5 minutes
Factory setting
[10 minutes] 10 10 minutes
[30 minutes] 30 30 minutes
[1 hour] 1h 1 hour
[2 hours] 2h 2 hours
[3 hours] 3h 3 hours
[Unlimited] Ct Continuous

254 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Catch on the fly] FLr- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Catch on the fly]

[Catch On Fly] FLr

Catch on the fly.
Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events:
 Loss of line supply or disconnection.
 Clearing clearance of current detected error or automatic restart.
 Freewheel stop.

The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated or measured speed of the motor at the time of
the restart, then follows the ramp to the reference speed.
This function requires 2-wire level control.
When the function is operational, it activates at each run command, resulting in a slight delay of the current
(0.5 s max).
[Catch On Fly] FLr is forced to [No] nO if [Auto DC Injection] AdC is set to [Continuous] Ct.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Function inactive.
Factory setting
[Yes On YES Function active only after freewheel stop.
Freewheel]

[Catch on Fly Sensitivity] VCb

Catch on fly sensitivity.
Setting the value of parameter [Catch on Fly Sensitivity] VCb too low may cause a wrong estimation of
the speed of the motor.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Only reduce gradually the value of parameter [Catch on Fly Sensitivity] VCb.
 During commissioning, verify that the drive and the system operate as intended by performing tests
and simulations in a controlled environment under controlled conditions
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Description
0.10...100.00 V Setting range
Factory setting: 0.20 V

EAV64387 12/2019 255

Complete settings CSt-

[Motor thermal monit] tHt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Motor thermal monit]

About this Menu

Motor thermal protection by calculating the I2t.
NOTE: The motor thermal state is memorized when the drive is switched off. The power-off time is used
to calculate the motor thermal state at the next startup.
 Self-cooled motors: The trigger curves depend on the motor frequency.
 Forced-cooled motors: Only the 50 Hz trigger curves needs to be considered, regardless of the motor
frequency.
Below a curve for 50Hz motor.

Below a curve for 60Hz motor.

256 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Motor Thermal Mode] tHt

Motor thermal monitoring mode.
NOTE: An error is detected when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and reactivation occurs
when the state falls back below 100%.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No thermal protection
[Self cooled] ACL Self ventilated motor
Factory setting
[Force-cool] FCL Fan-cooled motor

[Motor Thermal Thd] ttd

Motor thermal state threshold.

Setting Description

0...118% Setting range

Factory setting: 100%

[MotorTemp ErrorResp] OLL

Overload error response.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Free wheel
Factory setting

EAV64387 12/2019 257

Complete settings CSt-

[Output phase loss] OPL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Output phase loss]

[OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL

Output phase loss assignment.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If output phase monitoring is disabled, phase loss and, by implication, accidental disconnection of cables,
are not detected.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Function Inactive] nO Function inactive
[OPF Error YES Tripping on [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL with freewheel stop
Triggered] Factory setting
[No Error OAC No detected error triggered, but management of the output voltage in order
Triggered] to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established and
catch on the fly performed (even if this function has not been
configured).The drive switches to [Output cut ]SOC state after [OutPhL
Time] Odt time. Catch on fly is possible as soon as the drive is in stand
by output cut [Output cut] SOC state.

[OutPhaseLoss Delay] Odt

Output (motor) phase loss detection time.
Time delay for taking the [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL detected error into account.

Setting Description
0.5...10 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.5 s

[Input phase loss] IPL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Input phase loss]

[InPhaseLoss Assign] IPL

Loss of input phase error response.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting

258 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[External error] EtF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [External error]

[Ext Error Assign] EtF

External error assignment.
If the assigned bit state is:
 0: there is no external error.
 1: there is an external error

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[DI1 (Low L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
level)]...[DI6 (Low
level)]

[Ext Error Resp] EPL

Drive response to external error.
Type of stop in the event of an external detected error.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO External detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] Stt (see page 152),
without tripping. In this case, the detected error relay does not open and the
drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected error disappears, according
to the restart conditions of the active command channel (for example,
according to [2/3-wire control] tCC and [2-wire type] tCt if control is via
the terminals). Configuring a warning for this detected error is
recommended (assigned to a digital output, for example) in order to indicate
the cause of the stop.
[Fallback speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed(1)
[Speed rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected error
maintained] occurred, as long as the detected error is active and the run command has
not been removed(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC Injection] dCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with some other
functions.
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

EAV64387 12/2019 259

Complete settings CSt-

[Undervoltage handling] USb- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Undervoltage handling]

[Undervoltage Resp] USb

Response to undervoltage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Error Triggered] 0 The drive triggers an error (the detected error relay assigned to [Operating
State Fault] FLt will be opened)
Factory setting
[Error Triggered 1 The drive triggers an error (the detected error relay assigned to [Operating
w/o Relay] State Fault] FLt remains closed)
[Warning 2 The warning and detected error relay remain closed. The warning can be
Triggered] assigned to a digital output or a relay

[Mains Voltage] UrES

Rated voltage of the mains supply in Vac.
The factory setting value of this parameter depends of drive rating.

Settings Code / Value Description

[380 Vac] 380 380 Vac
[400 Vac] 400 400 Vac
[415 Vac] 415 415 Vac
Factory setting

[Undervoltage Level] USL

Undervoltage level.
The factory setting is determined by the drive voltage rating.

Setting Description
190...212 Vac Setting range, according to drive rating
Factory setting: According to drive rating

[UnderVolt Timeout] USt

Undervoltage timeout.

Setting Description
0.2...999.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.2 s

[Stop Type PLoss] StP

Controlled stop on power loss.
Behavior in the event of the undervoltage prevention level being reached.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No action
Factory setting
[DC Maintain] MMS This stop mode uses the inertia of the application to maintain the control
block powered, and thus to keep operational I/O state and fieldbus link as
long as possible.
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop following an adjustable deceleration ramp [Max stop time] StM in
order to help to prevent from uncontrolled stop of the application.
[Freewheel Stop] LnF Lock (freewheel stop) without triggering an error

260 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[UnderV. Restart Tm] tSM

Undervoltage restart time.
This parameter can be accessed if [CtrlStopPLoss] StP is set to [Ramp stop] rMP.
The time delay before authorizing the restart after a complete stop for [CtrlStopPLoss] StP is set to
[Ramp stop] rMP if the voltage has returned to normal.

Setting Description
1.0...999.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 1.0 s

[Prevention Level] UPL

Undervoltage prevention level.
This parameter can be accessed if [CtrlStopPLoss] StP is set to [No] nO.
The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the [Mains
Voltage] UrES value.

Setting Description
212...254 V Setting range
Factory setting: According to drive rating

[Max Stop Time] StM

Maximum stop time.
This parameter can be accessed if [CtrlStopPLoss] StP is set to [Ramp stop] rMP.
This parameter defines the deceleration ramp time in case of mains loss. During this controlled stop, the
drive is powered thanks to the inertia of the application, the motor is in generator mode. It is recommended
to verify that the deceleration set is compatible with the application inertia.

Setting Description
0.01...60.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 1.00 s

[DC Bus Maintain Time] tbS

DC bus maintain time.
This parameter can be accessed if [CtrlStopPLoss] StP is set to [DC Maintain] MMS.

Setting Description
1...9999 s Setting range
Factory setting: 9999 s

EAV64387 12/2019 261

Complete settings CSt-

[Ground Fault] GrFL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Ground Fault]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if [Access Level] is set to [Expert] EPr
If the internal ground fault detection [Ground Fault] GrFL causes unwanted results in your application,
it is possible to substitute the internal ground fault detection by an approriate external ground fault
monitoring system. Setting the parameter [Ground Fault] GrFL to [ErrorDetect Disable] INH or to a
percentage value of the nominal current of the drive disables the internal ground fault detection of the drive
or reduces its effectiveness. Therefore, you must install an external ground fault detection system that is
able to reliably detect ground faults.

DANGER
GROUND FAULT MONITORING DISABLED
 Only set the parameter [Ground Fault] GrFL to [ErrorDetect Disable] INH or to a percentage value
of the nominal current of the drive after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations
and standards that apply to the device and to the application.
 Implement an alternative, external ground fault monitoring function that allows for an adequate,
equivalent response to a ground fault of the drive in compliance with all applicable regulations and
standards as well as the risk assessment.
 Commission and test the system with all monitoring functions enabled.
 During commissioning, verify that the alternative, external ground fault detection system properly
detects any type of ground faults by performing tests and simulations in a controlled environment
under controlled conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

[Ground Fault Activation] GrFL

Ground fault error response.
NOTE: The setting of this parameter is taken into account after a product restart.

Setting Code / Value Description

[ErrorDetect InH Disables error detection
Disable]
[Yes] yES Use product internal value.
Factory setting
0.0...100.0% _ Setting range, in % of the drive nominal current

262 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[4-20mA loss] LFL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [4-20mA loss]

[AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1

Response to 4-20mA loss on AI1.
Drive behavior on AI1 4-20 event.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored. This is the only possible configuration if [AI1 min.
value] CrL1 is not greater than 3 mA
Factory setting
[Freewheel] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] Stt, without tripping. In
this case, the error relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as
soon as the detected error disappears, according to the restart conditions
of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3-wire control]
tCC and [2-wire type] tCt if control is via the terminals). Configuring a
warning for this detected error is recommended (assigned to a digital
output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop
[fallback spd] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Spd maint.] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected error
occurred, as long as the detected error is active and the run command has
not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with some other
functions
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

[AI2 4-20mA loss] LFL2

Response to 4-20mA loss on AI2.
Drive behavior on AI2 4-20 event.
Identical to [AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1

[AI3 4-20mA loss] LFL3

Response to 4-20mA loss on AI3.
Drive behavior on AI3 4-20 event.
Identical to [AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1

[AI4 4-20mA loss] LFL4

Response to 4-20mA loss on AI4.
Drive behavior on AI4 4-20 event.
Identical to [AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[AI5 4-20mA loss] LFL5

Response to 4-20mA loss on AI5.
Drive behavior on AI5 4-20 event.
Identical to [AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

EAV64387 12/2019 263

Complete settings CSt-

[Fallback Speed] LFF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Fallback Speed]

About This Menu

This menu allows you to set the fallback speed.
Depending on the configuration, the fallback speed is used as:
 A response to a thermal detected error on analog input (see page 244)
 A response to 4-20mA loss on Aix (see page 263)
 A response to an external detected error (see page 259)
 A response to a modbus interruption (see page 266)
 A response to a fieldbus module interruption (see page 267)

[Fallback Speed] LFF

Fall back speed.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

264 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Error detection disable] InH- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Error detection disable]

[ErrorDetect Disabled] InH

Disable error detection.
In rare cases, the monitoring functions of the drive may be unwanted because they impede the purpose of
the application. A typical example is a smoke extractor fan operating as a part of a fire protection system.
If a fire occurs, the smoke extractor fan should operate as long as possible, even if, for example, the
permissible ambient temperature of the drive is exceeded. In such applications, damage to or destruction
of the device may be acceptable as collateral damage, for example, to keep other damage from occurring
whose hazard potential is assessed to be more severe.
A parameter is provided to disable certain monitoring functions in such applications so that automatic error
detection and automatic error responses of the device are no longer active. You must implement
alternative monitoring functions for disabled monitoring functions that allow operators and/or master
control systems to adequately respond to conditions which correspond to detected errors. For example, if
overtemperature monitoring of the drive is disabled, the drive of a smoke extractor fan may itself cause a
fire if errors go undetected. An overtemperature condition can be, for example, signaled in a control room
without the drive being stopped immediately and automatically by its internal monitoring functions.

DANGER
MONITORING FUNCTIONS DISABLED, NO ERROR DETECTION
 Only use this parameter after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and
standards that apply to the device and to the application.
 Implement alternative monitoring functions for disabled monitoring functions that do not trigger
automatic error responses of the drive, but allow for adequate, equivalent responses by other means
in compliance with all applicable regulations and standards as well as the risk assessment.
 Commission and test the system with the monitoring functions enabled.
 During commissioning, verify that the drive and the system operate as intended by performing tests
and simulations in a controlled environment under controlled conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.

If the assigned input or bit state is:
 0: error detection is enabled.
 1: error detection is disabled.

Current errors are cleared on a rising edge from 0 to 1 of the assigned input or bit.
Detection of following errors can be disabled: CNF, EPF1, EPF2, FWER, INFB, INFD, INFK, INFP, INFR,
INFU, LFF1, LFF2, LFF3, LFF4, LFF5, MPLF, OBF, OHF, OLC, OLF, OPF1, OPF2, OSF, PFMF, PGLF,
PHF, SLF1, SLF3, SOF, STF, T2CF, T3CF, T4CF, T5CF, TH2F, TH3F, TH4F, TH5F, TJF, TNF, ULF, USF.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration

EAV64387 12/2019 265

Complete settings CSt-

[Fieldbus monitoring] CLL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Fieldbus monitoring]

[Modbus Error Resp] SLL

Response to Modbus interruption.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to nO, Modbus communication monitoring is disabled.
 Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
 Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
 Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the commissioning
procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with integrated Modbus.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] Stt, without tripping. In
this case, the error relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as
soon as the detected error disappears, according to the restart conditions
of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3-wire control]
tCC and [2-wire type] tCt if control is via the terminals)(1)
[fallback spd] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed(1)
[Spd maint.] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected error
occurred, as long as the detected error is active and the run command has
not been removed(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with some other
functions
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

266 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Communication module] COMO- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Communication module]

[Fieldbus Interrupt Resp] CLL

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to nO, fieldbus communication monitoring is disabled.
 Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
 Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
 Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the commissioning
procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Response to fieldbus module communication interruption.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] Stt, without tripping. In
this case, the error relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as
soon as the detected error disappears, according to the restart conditions
of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3-wire control]
tCC and [2-wire type] tCt if control is via the terminals)(1)
[fallback spd] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed(1)
[Spd maint.] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected error
occurred, as long as the detected error is active and the run command has
not been removed(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with some other
functions
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

EAV64387 12/2019 267

Complete settings CSt-

[Error/Warning handling] CSWM- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling]

[Tuning Error Resp] tnL

Response to autotune error.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting

268 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Process underload] ULd- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Process underload]

Process Underload Detected Error

A process underload is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a minimum time
[Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt, which is configurable:
 The motor is in steady state and the torque is below the set underload limit ([Unld.Thr.0.Speed] LUL,
[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] LUn, [Unld. FreqThr. Det.] rMUd parameters).
 The motor is in steady state when the offset between the frequency reference and motor frequency falls
below the configurable threshold [Hysteresis Freq] Srb.
Between zero frequency and the rated frequency, the curve reflects the following equation: torque = LUL
+ (LUn - LUL) x (frequency)2 / (rated frequency)2The underload function is not active for frequencies
below rMUD.

1 Underload zone.

A relay or a digital output can be assigned to the signaling of this detected error in the [Input/Output] IO-
, [I/O assignment] IOAS- menus.

[Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt

Underload detection time delay.
A value of 0 deactivates the function and makes the other parameters inaccessible.

Setting Description
0...100 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0 s

[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] LUn
Underload threshold at nominal motor speed [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS, as a % of the rated motor torque.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt is not set to 0.

Setting Description
20...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 60%

EAV64387 12/2019 269

Complete settings CSt-

[Unld.Thr.0.Speed] LUL
Underload threshold at zero frequency as a % of the rated motor torque.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt is not set to 0.

Setting Description
0...[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] LUn Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

[Unld. FreqThr. Det.] rMUd

Minimum frequency underload detection threshold.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt is not set to 0.

Setting Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Hysteresis Freq] Srb

Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which defines a steady
state operation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt or [Ovld Time Detect.] TOLis not set to 0.

Setting Description
0.3...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.3 Hz

[Underload Mangmt.] UdL

Underload management.
Behavior on switching to underload detection.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt is not set to 0.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FST Fast stop

[Underload T.B.Rest.] FtU

Minimum time permitted between an underload being detected and any automatic restart.
To allow an automatic restart, the value of [Fault Reset Time] tAr must exceed this parameter by at least
1 minute.
This parameter can be accessed if [Underload Mangmt.] UdL is not set to [Ignore] No.

Setting Description
0...6 min Setting range
Factory setting: 0 min

270 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Process overload] OLd- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Process overload]

About This Menu

A process overload error is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a minimum time
[Ovld Time Detect.] tOL, which is configurable:
 The drive is in [Current limitation] CLI mode during acceleration, deceleration, or,
 The motor is in steady state and the [Motor Current] LCR is above the set overload threshold [Ovld
Detection Thr.] LOC.
The motor is in steady state when the offset difference between [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FRH and [Motor
Frequency] RFR is less than the configurable threshold [Hysteresis Freq] Srb.

NOTE: Process overload monitoring is always active in [Current limitation] CLI state.

[Ovld Time Detect.] tOL

Overload reaction time.
A value of 0 deactivates the function and makes the other parameters inaccessible.

Setting Description
0...100 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0 s

[Ovld Detection Thr.] LOC

Overload threshold.
Overload detection threshold, as a % of the rated motor current [Nom Motor Current] nCr. This value
must be less than the limit current in order for the function to work.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Time Detect.] tOL is not set to 0.

Setting Description
70...150% Setting range
Factory setting: 110%

EAV64387 12/2019 271

Complete settings CSt-

[Hysteresis Freq] Srb

Hysteresis for steady state.
Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which defines a steady
state operation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Time Detect.] tOL or [Unld T. Del. Detect.] ULT is not set to 0.

Setting Description
0.3...500.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.3 Hz

[Ovld.Proces.Mngmt] OdL
Behavior on switching to overload detection.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Time Detect.] tOL is not set to 0.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop

[Overload T.B.Rest.] FtO

Minimum time permitted between an overload being detected and any automatic restart.
In order to allow an automatic restart, the value of [Fault Reset Time] tAr must exceed this parameter
by at least 1 minute.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Time Detect.] tOL or [Ovld.Process.Mngmt] odL is not set to
0.

Setting Description
0...6 min Setting range
Factory setting: 0 min

272 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Warn grp 1 definition] A1C- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Warning groups config] [Warn grp 1 definition]

About This Menu

The following submenus group the warnings into 1 to 5 groups, each of which can be assigned to a relay
or a digital output for remote signaling.
When one or a number of warnings selected in a group occur, this warning group is activated.

List of Warnings
The list of warning codes is available in the chapter "Diagnostics and Troubleshooting" (see page 304).

[Warn grp 2 definition] A2C- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Warning groups config] [Warn grp 2 definition]

About This Menu

Identical to [Warn grp 1 definition] A1C (see page 273)

[Warn grp 3 definition] A3C- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Warning groups config] [Warn grp 3 definition]

About This Menu

Identical to [Warn grp 1 definition] A1C (see page 273)

[Warn grp 4 definition] A4C- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Warning groups config] [Warn grp 4 definition]

About This Menu

Identical to [Warn grp 1 definition] A1C (see page 273)

[Warn grp 5 definition] A5C- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Warning groups config] [Warn grp 5 definition]

About This Menu

Identical to [Warn grp 1 definition] A1C (see page 273)

EAV64387 12/2019 273

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.22
[Maintenance]

[Maintenance]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Diagnostics] dAU- Menu 275
[Fan management] FAMA- Menu 276
[Maintenance] CSMA- Menu 277

274 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Diagnostics] dAU- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Maintenance] [Diagnostics]

About This Menu

This menu allows you to make simple test sequences for diagnostics.

[FAN Diagnostics] FNT

Diagnostics of internal fan(s).
This starts a test sequence.
NOTE: This diagnostic is not accessible on ATV610U07N4 frame size 0.
NOTE: Fan diagnostics of internal fan(s) will be not-successful if the DC bus is not fully charged. This will
be the case on separate control (e.g. the control block is only supplied on 24V).

[LED Diagnostics] HLT

Diagnostics of product LED(s).
This starts a test sequence.

[IGBT Diag w motor]IWT

Diagnostics of product IGBT(s).
This will start a test sequence with the connected motor (open circuit/short-circuit).

[IGBT Diag w/o motor]IWOT

Diagnostics of product IGBT(s).
This starts a test sequence without the motor (short-circuit).

EAV64387 12/2019 275

Complete settings CSt-

[Fan management] FAMA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Maintenance] [Fan management]

About This Menu

Fan speed and [Fan Operation Time] FPbt are monitored values.
An abnormal low speed or the fan trigger a warning [Fan Feedback Warning] FFdA. As soon as [Fan
Operation Time] FPbt reach the predefined value of 45,000 hours, a warning [Fan Counter Warning]
FCtA is triggered.
[Fan Operation Time] FPbt counter can be set to 0 by using the [Counter Reset] rPr parameter.

[Fan Mode] FFM

Fan activation mode.
NOTE: For ATV610U07N4 frame size 0, this parameter is forced to [Never] STP.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Standard] Std The operation of the fan is enabled when the motor is running. According to
the drive rating, this could be the only available setting
Factory setting
[Always] rUn The fan is always activated
[Economy] eco The fan is activated only if necessary, according to the internal thermal state
of the drive

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the ambient temperature does not exceed 40 °C (104° F) if the fan is disabled.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

If [Fan Mode] FFM is set to [Never] Stp, the fan of the drive is disabled.

276 EAV64387 12/2019

 Complete settings CSt-

[Maintenance] CSMA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Maintenance]

[Time Counter Reset] rPr

Time counter reset.
NOTE: The list of possible values depends on the product size.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[Run Time Reset] rtH Run time reset
[Power ON Time PtH Power ON time reset
Reset]
[Reset Fan FtH Reset fan counter
Counter]
[Clear NSM] nsm Clear number of motor starts

[Overmodul. Activation] OVMA

This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPR.
The purpose of the Overmodulation is to compensate the loss of output voltage due to the load.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Default] DEFAULT Overmodulation is not configured
Factory setting
[Full] FULL Over modulation is active

EAV64387 12/2019 277

Complete settings CSt-

278 EAV64387 12/2019

 Easy Altivar ATV610
Communication COM-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 7
[Communication] COM-

[Communication] COM-

Introduction

[Communication] COM- menu presents the fieldbus submenus.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Modbus Fieldbus] Md1- Menu 280
[Com. scanner input] ICS- Menu 281
[Com. scanner output] OCS- Menu 282
[Profibus] PbC- Menu 283

EAV64387 12/2019 279

Communication COM-

[Modbus Fieldbus] Md1- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Modbus Fieldbus]

About This Menu

This menu is related to the Modbus serial communication port on the bottom of the control block.
Refer to the Modbus serial manual.

[Modbus Address] Add

Drive Modbus address.

Setting Description
[OFF] Off ...247 Setting range
Factory setting: [OFF] Off

[Bd.RateModbus] tbr
Baud rate Modbus.

Setting Code / Value Description

[4800 bps] 4k8 4,800 Bauds
[9600 bps] 9k6 9,600 Bauds
[19200 bps] 19k2 19,200 Bauds
Factory setting
[38.4 Kbps] 38k4 38,400 Bauds

[Modbus Format] tFO

Modbus communication format.

Setting Code / Value Description

[8-O-1] 8o1 8 bits odd parity 1 stop bit
[8-E-1] 8E1 8 bits even parity 1 stop bit
Factory setting
[8-N-1] 8n1 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit
[8-N-2] 8n2 8 bits no parity 2 stop bits

[Modbus Timeout] ttO

Modbus timeout.

Setting Description
0.1 ...30.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 10.s

280 EAV64387 12/2019

 Communication COM-

[Com. scanner input] ICS- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Com. scanner input]

[Scan. IN1 address] nMA1

Address of the first input word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 3201 (EtA)

[Scan. IN2 address] nMA2

Address of the second input word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 8604 (rFrd)

[Scan. IN3 address] nMA3

Address of the third input word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[Scan. IN4 address] nMA4

Address of the fourth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.

[Scan. IN5 address] nMA5

Address of the fifth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.

[Scan. IN6 address] nMA6

Address of the sixth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.

[Scan. IN7 address] nMA7

Address of the seventh input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.

[Scan. IN8 address] nMA8

Address of the eighth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.

EAV64387 12/2019 281

Communication COM-

[Com. scanner output] OCS- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Com. scanner output]

[Scan.Out1 address] nCA1

Address of the first output word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 8501(CMd)

[Scan.Out2 address] nCA2

Address of the second output word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 8602(LFrd)

[Scan.Out3 address] nCA3

Address of the third output word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[Scan.Out4 address] nCA4

Address of the fourth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.

[Scan.Out5 address] nCA5

Address of the fifth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.

[Scan.Out6 address] nCA6

Address of the sixth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.

[Scan.Out7 address] nCA7

Address of the seventh output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.

[Scan.Out8 address] nCA8

Address of the eighth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.

282 EAV64387 12/2019

 Communication COM-

[Profibus] PbC- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Profibus]

About This Menu

Refer to the Profibus DP fieldbus module manual.

EAV64387 12/2019 283

Communication COM-

284 EAV64387 12/2019

 Easy Altivar ATV610
File management FMt-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 8
[File management] FMt-

[File management] FMt-

Introduction

[File management] FMt- menu presents the management of drive configuration files.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Transfer config file] tCF- Menu 286
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu 286
[Parameter group list] FrY- Menu 287
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu 288
[Firmware update diag] FWUD- Menu 289

EAV64387 12/2019 285

File management FMt-

[Transfer config file] tCF- Menu

Access
[File management] [Transfer config file]

[Copy to the drive] OPF

This allows to select a previously saved configuration from the Plain Text Display Terminal memory and
transfer it to the .
The needs to be restarted after a configuration file transfer.

[Copy from the drive] SAF

This allows to save the actual configuration into the Plain Text Display Terminal memory.
NOTE: The Graphic Display Terminal can store up to 16 configuration files.

[Factory settings] FCS- Menu

Access
[File management] [Factory settings]

About This Menu

This parameter allows to select the configuration to restore in case of factory setting operation.

[Config. Source] FCSI

Setting Code / Value Description

[Macro-Conf] InI Factory setting parameter set
Factory setting
[Config 1] CFG1 Customer parameter set 1
[Config 2] CFG2 Customer parameter set 2
[Config 3] CFG3 Customer parameter set 3

286 EAV64387 12/2019

 File management FMt-

[Parameter group list] FrY- Menu

Access
[File management] [Factory settings] [Parameter group list]

About This Menu

Selection of menus to be loaded.
NOTE: In factory configuration and after a return to "factory settings", [Parameter group list] FrY will be
empty.

[All] ALL
All parameters in all menus.

[Drive Configuration] drM

Load [Complete settings] CSt- menu.

[Motor Param] MOt

Load [Motor parameters] MPA- menu.

[Comm. Menu] COM

Load [Communication] COM- menu.
This parameter can be accessed if [Config. Source] FCSI is set to [Macro-Conf] ini.

[Display Config.] dIS

Load [Display screen type] MSC- menu.
This parameter can be accessed if [Config. Source] FCSI is set to [Macro-Conf] ini.

EAV64387 12/2019 287

File management FMt-

[Factory settings] FCS- Menu

Access
[File management] [Factory settings]

[Go to Factory settings] GFS

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that restoring the factory settings is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

It is only possible to revert to the factory settings if at least one group of parameters has previously been
selected.

[Save Configuration] SCSI

Save configuration.
The active configuration to be saved does not appear for selection. For example, if it is [Config 0] Str0,
only [ Config 1] Str1, [Config 2] Str2 and [ Config 3] Str3 appear. The parameter changes back
to[No] nO as soon as the operation is complete.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[Config 0] Str0 Store customer parameter set 0
[Config 1] Str1 Store customer parameter set 1
[Config 2] Str2 Store customer parameter set 2
[Config 3] Str3 Store customer parameter set 3

288 EAV64387 12/2019

 File management FMt-

[Firmware update diag] FWUD- Menu

Access
[File management] [Firmware update] [Firmware update diag]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed in expert mode.

[Firmware Update Status] FWSt

Setting Code / Value Description

[Inactive] CHECK Firmware update inactive
[PwrUpd in POWER Power update in progress
progress]
[PwrUpd Pending] PEND Power update pending
[Ready] RDY Firmware update ready
[Inactive] NO Firmware update inactive
[Succeeded] SUCCD Firmware update succeeded
[Update Error] FAILED Update error
[In Progress] PROG Firmware update in progress
[Requested] RQSTD Firmware update requested
[Transfer In TRLD Transfer in progress
Progress]
[Transfer Done] TROK Transfer done
[Package cleared] CLEAR Package cleared
[Warning] SUCWR Firmware update succeeded with warnings
[Drive State Error] FLSTA state error
[Package Error] FLPKG Package error
[Saving conf] SAvE Firmware update is saving the current configuration
[Post Script] POSt Firmware update is doing the post FWUPD

[Firmware Update Error] FWEr

Setting Code / Value Description

[No Error] NO No error
[Lock Error] LOCK Lock error
[Package Error] MD5 Package error
[Package COMP Package compatibility error
compatibility error]
[Ask error] ASK Ask error
[Reset Drive Error] RESET Reset error
[Conf Saving SAVE Configuration saving warning
Warning]
[Conf Loading LOAD Configuration loading warning
Warning]
[Post Script SCP Post script warning
Warning]
[Package DES Package description error
Description Error]
[Package not PKG Package not found
found]
[Power Supply SPWr Power supply error
error]
[Boot M3 error] BTM3 Boot M3 error

EAV64387 12/2019 289

File management FMt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Boot C28 error] BTC28 Boot C28 error
[M3 Error] M3 M3 error
[C28 error] C28 C28 error
[CPLD error] CPLD CPLD error
[Boot Power Error] PWR Boot power error
[Emb. Eth Boot EMBT Embedded ethernet boot error
Error]
[Emb. Eth Error] EMIL Embedded ethernet error
[Emb. Eth Web EMWB Embedded ethernet WebServer error
Error]
[Module Eth Boot OPTBT Module ethernet boot error
Error]
[Module Eth Error] OPTIL Module ethernet error
[Module Eth Web OPTWB Module ethernet WebServer error
Error]
[Password PSWD Password enabled
enabled]
[Flash Error] MEM Flash error
[Package error] IFO Package information error

290 EAV64387 12/2019

 Easy Altivar ATV610
My preferences MYP-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 9
[My preferences] MYP-

[My preferences] MYP-

Introduction

[My preferences] MYP- menu presents the possible settings for the user-defined HMI and
parameter access.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
9.1 [Language] 292
9.2 [Password] 293
9.3 [Customization] 295
9.4 [Access level] 296
9.5 [LCD settings] 297

EAV64387 12/2019 291

My preferences MYP-

Section 9.1
[Language]

[Language]

[Language] LnG- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Language]

About This Menu

This menu allows to select the Plain Text Display Terminal language.
The following languages can be selected:
 English,
 Chinese,
 German,
 Spanish,
 French,
 Italian,
 Russian,
 Turkish.

292 EAV64387 12/2019

 My preferences MYP-

Section 9.2
[Password]

[Password]

[Password] COd- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Password]

About This Menu

Enables the configuration to be protected with an access code or a password to be entered in order to
access a protected configuration:
 The is unlocked when the password is set to [No password defined] nO or when the correct password
has been entered. All menus can be accessed.
 Before protecting the configuration with a password, you must:
 Define the [Upload rights] ULr and [Download rights] dLr.
 Make a careful note of the password and keep it in a place where you are able to find it.

[Password status] PSSt

Password status.
Read only parameter.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No password nO No password defined
defined] Factory setting
[Password is UL Password is unlocked
unlocked]
[Password is LOC Password is locked
locked]

[Password] PWd
6-characters password.To lock the drive, define and enter your password. [Password status] PSSt value
switches to [Password is locked] LOC.
To unlock the drive, the password must be entered. Once the correct code has been entered, the is
unlocked and [[Password status] PSSt value switches to [Password is unlocked] UL. Access will be
locked again the next time the is switched on.
To modify the password, unlock the drive then enter the new password. Entering a new password locks
the drive.
To remove the password, the drive must be unlocked and the password 000000 must be entered.
[[Password status] PSSt value switches to [No password defined] NO. At next switch-on, the remains
unlocked.

[Upload rights] ULr

Upload rights.

Code / Value Description

Setting
[Permitted] ULr0 Commissioning tools or the Plain Text Display Terminal can save the whole
configuration (password, monitoring, configuration)
Factory setting
[Not allowed] ULr1 Commissioning tools or the Plain Text Display Terminal cannot save the
configuration if the is not protected by a password or if the in-correct
password has been entered

EAV64387 12/2019 293

My preferences MYP-

[Download rights] DLr

Download rights.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Locked drv] DLr0 Lock : the configuration can be downloaded to the only if the is protected by
a password, which is the same as the password of the configuration to be
downloaded
[Unlock. drv] DLr1 Unlock : the configuration can be downloaded to the or a configuration can
be modified if the is unlocked or is not protected by a password
Factory setting
[Not allowed] DLr2 The configuration cannot be downloaded
[Lock/unlock] DLr3 Combination of [Locked drv] dLr0 and [Unlock. drv] dLr1

294 EAV64387 12/2019

 My preferences MYP-

Section 9.3
[Customization]

[Customization]

[Display screen type] MSC- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Customization] [Display screen type]

[Display value type] Mdt

Type of screen display.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Digital] dEC Digital value
Factory setting
[Bar graph] bAr Bar graph

[Parameter Selection] MPC

Customized selection.
This view allows to select the parameters to display on the default screen.

EAV64387 12/2019 295

My preferences MYP-

Section 9.4
[Access level]

[Access level]

[Access level] LAC- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Access level]

[Access Level] LAC

Level of access control.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Basic] bAS Access to all menus.

Factory setting
[Expert] EPr Access to all menus and to additional parameters.

296 EAV64387 12/2019

 My preferences MYP-

Section 9.5
[LCD settings]

[LCD settings]

[LCD settings] CnL- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [LCD settings]

About This Menu

This menu allows to set the Plain Text Display Terminal related parameters.

[Screen Contrast] CSt

Screen contrast setting.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 50%

[Standby] SbY
Stand-by delay.
NOTE: Disabling the automatic standby function of the display terminal backlight will reduce the backlight
service time.

Setting Description
nO...10 min Automatic backlight OFF time
Factory setting: 10 min

[Display Terminal locked] KLCK

Plain Text Display Terminal key locked. Press ESC and Home keys to Lock manually & unlock the Plain
Text Display Terminal keys. The Stop key remains active when the Plain Text Display Terminal is locked.

Setting Description
nO...10 min Setting range
Factory setting: 5 min

EAV64387 12/2019 297

My preferences MYP-

298 EAV64387 12/2019

 Easy Altivar ATV610
Maintenance and Diagnostics
EAV64387 12/2019

Part III
Maintenance and diagnostics

Maintenance and diagnostics

What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
10 Maintenance 301
11 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 303

EAV64387 12/2019 299

Maintenance and Diagnostics

300 EAV64387 12/2019

 Easy Altivar ATV610
Maintenance
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 10
Maintenance

Maintenance

Maintenance

Limitation of Warranty
The warranty does not apply if the product has been opened, except by Schneider Electric services.

Servicing

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Read and understand the instructions in Safety Information chapter before performing any procedure in
this chapter.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

The temperature of the products described in this manual may exceed 80 °C (176 °F) during operation.

WARNING
HOT SURFACES
 Ensure that any contact with hot surfaces is avoided.
 Do not allow flammable or heat-sensitive parts in the immediate vicinity of hot surfaces.
 Verify that the product has sufficiently cooled down before handling it.
 Verify that the heat dissipation is sufficient by performing a test run under maximum load conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING
INSUFFICIENT MAINTENANCE
Verify that the maintenance activities described below are performed at the specified intervals.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Adherence to the environmental conditions must be ensured during operation of the drive. In addition,
during maintenance, verify and, if appropriate, correct all factors that may have an impact on the
environmental conditions.

Part concerned Activity Interval (1)

Overall All parts such as housing, HMI, control Perform a visual inspection At least every year
condition block, connections, etc.
Corrosion Terminals, connectors, screws, EMC Inspect and clean if required
plate
Dust Terminals, fans, enclosures air inlets Inspect and clean if required
and air outlets, air filters of cabinet
Floor standing drives filter mats Inspect At least every year
Change At least every 4 years
(1) Maximum maintenance intervals from the date of commissioning. Reduce the intervals between maintenance to
adapt maintenance to the environmental conditions, the operating conditions of the drive, and to any other factor
that may influence the operation and/ or maintenance requirements of the drive.

EAV64387 12/2019 301

Maintenance

Part concerned Activity Interval (1)

Cooling Wall mounting drives fan Verify the fan operation At least every year
Replace the fan, see catalog After 3 to 5 years,
and the instructions sheets on depending on the
www.schneider-electric.com. operating conditions
Fastening All screws for electrical and Verify tightening torques
mechanical connections
(1) Maximum maintenance intervals from the date of commissioning. Reduce the intervals between maintenance to
adapt maintenance to the environmental conditions, the operating conditions of the drive, and to any other factor
that may influence the operation and/ or maintenance requirements of the drive.

Spares and Repairs

Serviceable product. Please contact your Customer Care Center on:
www.schneider-electric.com/CCC.

Long Time Storage

If the drive was not connected to mains for an extended period of time, the capacitors must be restored to
their full performance before the motor is started.

NOTICE
REDUCED CAPACITOR PERFORMANCE
 Apply mains voltage to the drive for one hour before starting the motor if the drive has not been
connected to mains for the following periods of time:
 12 months at a maximum storage temperature of +50°C (+122°F)
 24 months at a maximum storage temperature of +45°C (+113°F)
 36 months at a maximum storage temperature of +40°C (+104°F)

 Verify that no Run command can be applied before the period of one hour has elapsed.
 Verify the date of manufacture if the drive is commissioned for the first time and run the specified
procedure if the date of manufacture is more than 12 months in the past.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

If the specified procedure cannot be performed without a Run command because of internal mains
contactor control, perform this procedure with the power stage enabled, but the motor being at standstill
so that there is no appreciable mains current in the capacitors.

Fan Replacement
It is possible to order a new fan for the drive maintenance, see the catalog numbers on www.schneider-
electric.com.

Customer Care Center

For additional support, you can contact our Customer Care Center on:
www.schneider-electric.com/CCC.

302 EAV64387 12/2019

 Easy Altivar ATV610
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 11
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Overview
This chapter describes the various types of diagnostics and provides troubleshooting assistance.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Read and understand the instructions in Safety Information chapter before performing any procedure in
this chapter.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
11.1 Warning Codes 304
11.2 Error Codes 305
11.3 FAQ 346

EAV64387 12/2019 303

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Section 11.1
Warning Codes

Warning Codes

Warning Codes

List of Available Warnings Messages

Setting Code Description

[No Warning stored] NOA No warning stored
[Fallback Frequency] FRF Reaction on event: Fallback frequency
[Speed Maintained] RLS Reaction on event: Speed maintained
[Type of stop] STT Reaction on event: Stop following [Type of stop] STT
without triggering an error
[Ref Frequency Warning] SRA Frequency reference reached
[PID error Warning] PEE PID error warning
[PID Feedback Warn] PFA PID feedback warning
[AI3 Th Warning] TP3A AI3 Thermal warning
[AI4 Th Warning] TP4A AI4 Thermal warning
[AI5 Th Warning] TP5A AI5 Thermal warning
[AI1 4-20 Loss Warning] AP1 AI1 4-20 mA loss warning
[AI3 4-20 Loss Warning] AP3 AI3 4-20 mA loss warning
[AI4 4-20 Loss Warning] AP4 AI4 4-20 mA loss warning
[AI5 4-20 Loss Warning] AP5 AI5 4-20 mA loss warning
[Fan Counter Warning] FCTA Fan counter speed warning
[Fan Feedback Warning] FFDA Fan feedback warning
[BR Thermal Warning] BOA Braking resistor thermal warning
[Ext. Error Warning] EFA External error warning
[Undervoltage Warning] USA Undervoltage warning
[Preventive UnderV Active] UPA Controlled stop threshold is reached
(see page 260)
[Mot Freq High Thd] FTA Motor frequency high threshold 1 reached
[Mot Freq Low Thd] FTAL Motor frequency low threshold 1 reached
[Mot Freq Low Thd 2] F2AL Motor frequency low threshold 2 reached
[High Speed Reached] FLA High speed reached warning
[Ref Freq High Thd reached] RTAH Reference frequency high threshold reached
[Ref Freq Low Thd reached] RTAL Reference frequency low threshold reached
[2nd Freq Thd Reached] F2A Motor frequency high threshold 2 reached
[Current Thd Reached] CTA Motor current high threshold reached
[Low Current Reached] CTAL Motor current low threshold reached
[Process Undld Warning] ULA Underload warning
[Process Overload Warning] OLA Overload warning
[Drv Therm Thd reached] TAD Drive thermal threshold reached
[Motor Therm Thd reached] TSA Motor thermal threshold reached
[Pos. Following Warn] PFES Position following warning
[Temp Sens AI2 Warn] TS2A Temperature sensor AI2 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI3 Warn] TS3A Temperature sensor AI3 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI4 Warn] TS4A Temperature sensor AI4 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI5 Warn] TS5A Temperature sensor AI5 warning (open circuit)

304 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Section 11.2
Error Codes

Error Codes

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Overview 307
[Circuit Breaker Error] CbF 308
[Incorrect Configuration] CFF 308
[Invalid Configuration] CFI 309
[Conf Transfer Error] CFI2 309
[Pre-settings Transfer Error] CFI3 310
[Fieldbus Com Interrupt] CnF 310
[Precharge Capacitor] CrF1 311
[Channel Switch Error] CSF 311
[EEPROM Control] EEF1 312
[EEPROM Power] EEF2 312
[External Error] EPF1 313
[Fieldbus Error] EPF2 313
[Firmware Update Error] FWEr 314
[Internal Link Error] ILF 314
[Internal Error 0] InF0 315
[Internal Error 1] InF1 315
[Internal Error 2] InF2 316
[Internal Error 3] InF3 316
[Internal Error 4] InF4 317
[Internal Error 6] InF6 317
[Internal Error 7] InF7 318
[Internal Error 8] InF8 318
[Internal Error 9] InF9 319
[Internal Error 10] InFA 319
[Internal Error 11] InFb 320
[Internal Error 12] InFC 320
[Internal Error 13] InFD 321
[Internal Error 14] InFE 321
[Internal Error 15] InFF 322
[Internal Error 16] InFG 322
[Internal Error 17] InFH 323
[Internal Error 20] InFk 323
[Internal Error 21] InFl 324
[Internal Error 25] InFP 324
[Internal Error 27] InFr 325
[Internal Error 30] InFU 325
[Input Contactor] LCF 326
[AI1 4-20mA loss] LFF1 326
[AI2 4-20mA loss] LFF2 327

EAV64387 12/2019 305

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Topic Page
[AI3 4-20mA loss] LFF3 327
[AI4 4-20mA loss] LFF4 328
[AI5 4-20mA loss] LFF5 328
[Lead Pump Error] mpLF 329
[DC Bus Overvoltage] ObF 329
[Overcurrent] OCF 330
[Drive Overheating] OHF 330
[Process Overload] OLC 331
[Motor Overload] OLF 331
[Single Output Phase Loss] OPF1 332
[Output Phase Loss] OPF2 332
[Supply Mains Overvoltage] OSF 333
[PID Feedback Error] PFMF 333
[Program Loading Error] PGLF 334
[Program Running Error] PGrF 334
[Input phase loss] PHF 335
[Motor short circuit] SCF1 335
[Ground Short Circuit] SCF3 336
[IGBT Short Circuit] SCF4 336
[Motor Short Circuit] SCF5 337
[Modbus Com Interruption] SLF1 337
[HMI Com Interruption] SLF3 338
[Motor Overspeed] SOF 338
[Motor Stall Error] StF 339
[AI2 Thermal Sensor Error] t2CF 339
[AI3 Thermal Sensor Error] t3CF 340
[AI4 Thermal Sensor Error] t4CF 340
[AI5 Thermal Sensor Error] t5CF 341
[AI2 Th Level Error] tH2F 341
[AI3 Th Level Error] tH3F 342
[AI4 Th Level Error] tH4F 342
[AI5 Th Level Error] tH5F 343
[IGBT Overheating] tJF 343
[Autotuning Error] tnF 344
[Process Underload] ULF 344
[Supply Mains UnderV] USF 345

306 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Overview

Clearing the Detected Error

This table presents the steps to follow if intervention on the drive system is required:

Step Action
1 Disconnect all power, including external control power that may be present.
2 Lock all power disconnects in the open position.
3 Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge (the drive LEDs are not indicators of the
absence of DC bus voltage).
4 Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA/+ and PC/- terminals to ensure that the voltage is less
than 42 Vdc.
5 If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely, contact your local Schneider Electric representative.
Do not repair or operate the drive.
6 Find and correct the cause of the detected error.
7 Restore power to the drive to confirm that the detected error has been rectified.

After the cause has been removed, the detected error can be cleared by:
 Switching off the drive.
 Using the [Product Restart] rP parameter.
 Using the digital input or the control bit assigned to [Prod Restart Assign] rPA.
 Using the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr- function.
 A digital input or control bit set to the [Fault reset] rSt- function.
 Pressing the STOP/RESET key on the Plain Text Display Terminal depending on the setting of [Stop
Key Enable] PSt.

How To Clear the Error Code?

The following table summarizes the possibilities to clear a detected error:

How to clear the error code after the cause has been List of the cleared error
removed
 Switch off the drive. All detected error.
 Use the [Product Restart] rP parameter.
 Use the digital input or the control bit assigned to [Prod
Restart Assign] rPA.
 As soon as its cause has been removed. CFF, CFI, CFI2, CFI3, CSF, FWER, PGLF, PHF, USF
 Use the digital input or the control bit assigned to [Fault SOF, TNF
Reset Assign] rSF.
 Press the STOP/RESET key.

 Use the digital input or the control bit assigned to [Fault CNF, EPF1, EPF2, INF9, INFB, INFD, LCF, LFF1,
Reset Assign] rSF. LFF2, LFF3, LFF4, LFF5, MPLF, OBF, OHF, OLC,
 Press the STOP/RESET key. OLF, OPF1, OPF2, OSF, PFMF, SCF4, SCF5, SLF1,
 Use the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr- function. SLF3, STF, T2CF, T3CF, T4CF, T5CF, TH2F, TH3F,
TH4F, TH5F, TJF, ULF

EAV64387 12/2019 307

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Circuit Breaker Error] CbF

Probable Cause
The DC bus voltage level is not correct compared to the circuit breaker logic control (start or stop pulse)
after the configured timeout [Mains V. time out] LCt.

Remedy
 Verify the circuit breaker logic control (pulse time for start and stop).
 Verify the mechanical state of the circuit breaker.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Incorrect Configuration] CFF

Probable Cause
 Option module changed or removed.
 Control block replaced by a control block configured on a drive with a different rating.
 The current configuration is inconsistent.

Remedy
 Verify that there is no detected error on the option module.
 In the event of the control block being changed deliberately, see the remarks below.
 Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup configuration if it is valid.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

308 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Invalid Configuration] CFI

Probable Cause
Invalid configuration. The configuration loaded in the drive via the commissioning tool or fieldbus is
inconsistent.

Remedy
 Verify the loaded configuration.
 Load a valid configuration.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Conf Transfer Error] CFI2

Probable Cause
 The configuration transfer to the drive was not successful or interrupted.
 The configuration loaded is not compatible with the drive.

Remedy
 Verify the configuration loaded previously.
 Load a compatible configuration.
 Use PC software commissioning tool to transfer a compatible configuration
 Perform a factory setting

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 309

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Pre-settings Transfer Error] CFI3

Probable Cause
The configuration transfer to the drive was not successful or interrupted.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Fieldbus Com Interrupt] CnF

Probable Cause
Communication interruption on fieldbus module.
This error is triggered when the communication between the fieldbus module and the master (PLC) is
interrupted.

Remedy
 Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
 Verify the wiring.
 Verify the timeout.
 Replace the option module.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

310 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Precharge Capacitor] CrF1

Probable Cause
 Charging circuit control detected error or charging resistor damaged.

Remedy
 Turn off the drive and then turn on again.
 Verify the internal connections.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Channel Switch Error] CSF

Probable Cause
Switch to an invalid channel.

Remedy
Verify the function parameters.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 311

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[EEPROM Control] EEF1

Probable Cause
An error of the internal memory of the control block has been detected.

Remedy
 Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
 Switch off the product.
 Return to factory settings.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[EEPROM Power] EEF2

Probable Cause
An error of the internal memory of the power board has been detected.

Remedy
 Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
 Switch off the product.
 Return to factory settings.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

312 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[External Error] EPF1

Probable Cause
 Event triggered by an external device, depending on user.
 An external error has been triggered via Embedded Ethernet.

Remedy
Remove the cause of the external error.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Fieldbus Error] EPF2

Probable Cause
An external error has been triggered via fieldbus.

Remedy
Remove the cause of the external error.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 313

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Firmware Update Error] FWEr

Probable Cause
Firmware update function has detected an error.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Internal Link Error] ILF

Probable Cause
Communication interruption between option module and the drive.

Remedy
 Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
 Verify the connections.
 Replace the option module.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

314 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 0] InF0

Probable Cause
 Communication interruption between microprocessors of the control board.
 The power board rating is not valid.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 1] InF1

Probable Cause
The power board rating is not valid.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

EAV64387 12/2019 315

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 2] InF2

Probable Cause
The power board is incompatible with the control block software.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 3] InF3

Probable Cause
Internal communication detected error.

Remedy
 Verify the wiring on drive control terminals (internal 10V supply for analog inputs overloaded).
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

316 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 4] InF4

Probable Cause
Internal data inconsistent.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 6] InF6

Probable Cause
 The option module installed in the drive is not recognized.
 The removable control terminal modules (if existing) are not present or not recognized.
 The embedded Ethernet adapter is not recognized.

Remedy
 Verify the catalog number and compatibility of the option module.
 Plug the removable control terminal modules after the drive has been switched off.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

EAV64387 12/2019 317

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 7] InF7

Probable Cause
Communication interruption with CPLD component of Control board.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 8] InF8

Probable Cause
The internal power switching supply is not correct.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

318 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 9] InF9

Probable Cause
An error on the current circuit measurement has been detected.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Internal Error 10] InFA

Probable Cause
The input stage is not operating correctly.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

EAV64387 12/2019 319

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 11] InFb

Probable Cause
The internal drive thermal sensor is not operating correctly.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Internal Error 12] InFC

Probable Cause

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

320 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 13] InFD

Probable Cause
Differential current deviation.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Internal Error 14] InFE

Probable Cause
Internal microprocessor detected error.

Remedy
 Verify that the error code can be cleared.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

EAV64387 12/2019 321

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 15] InFF

Probable Cause
Serial memory flash format error.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 16] InFG

Probable Cause
Communication interruption or internal error of output relays option module

Remedy
 Verify that the option module is correctly connected to the slot
 Replace the option module.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

322 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 17] InFH

Probable Cause
Communication interruption with the Extension module of digital & analog I/O or internal error of the
Extension module of digital & analog I/O.

Remedy
 Verify that the option module is correctly connected to the slot
 Replace the option module.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 20] InFk

Probable Cause
Option module interface board error.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

EAV64387 12/2019 323

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 21] InFl

Probable Cause
Internal Real Time Clock error. It could be a communication error between the keypad and the drive or a
clock oscillator start error.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 25] InFP

Probable Cause
Incompatibility between Control Board hardware version and firmware version.

Remedy
 Update the firmware package.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

324 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 27] InFr

Probable Cause
Diagnostics in CPLD have detected an error.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 30] InFU

Probable Cause
An error on the rectifier brick has been detected.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

EAV64387 12/2019 325

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Input Contactor] LCF

Probable Cause
The drive is not switched on even though [Mains V. time out ] LCt timeout has elapsed.

Remedy
 Verify the input contactor and its wiring.
 Verify the [Mains V. time out ] LCt timeout.
 Verify the supply mains/contactor/drive wiring.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI1 4-20mA loss] LFF1

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI1.
This error is triggered when the measured current is below 2 mA.

Remedy
 Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
 Verify the setting of [AI1 4-20mA loss] LFL1 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

326 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI2 4-20mA loss] LFF2

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI2.
This error is triggered when the measured current is below 2 mA.

Remedy
 Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
 Verify the setting of [AI2 4-20mA loss] LFL2 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI3 4-20mA loss] LFF3

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI3.
This error is triggered when the measured current is below 2 mA.

Remedy
 Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
 Verify the setting of [AI3 4-20mA loss] LFL3 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 327

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI4 4-20mA loss] LFF4

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI4.
This error is triggered when the measured current is below 2mA.

Remedy
 Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
 Verify the setting of [AI4 4-20mA loss] LFL4 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI5 4-20mA loss] LFF5

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI5.
This error is triggered when the measured current is below 2 mA.

Remedy
 Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
 Verify the setting of [AI5 4-20mA loss] LFL5 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

328 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Lead Pump Error] mpLF

Probable Cause
The selected lead pump is not available while in run.

Remedy
Verify the state of the corresponding drive digital input for the pump availability information (for example
[Pump 1 Ready Assign] MPI1 for the pump 1).

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[DC Bus Overvoltage] ObF

Probable Cause
 Deceleration time too short or driving load too high.
 Supply mains voltage too high.

Remedy
 Increase the deceleration time.
 Configure the [Dec ramp adapt.]brA function if it is compatible with the application.
 Verify the supply mains voltage.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 329

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Overcurrent] OCF

Probable Cause
 Parameters in the [Motor data] MOA- menu are not correct.
 Inertia or load too high.
 Mechanical locking.

Remedy
 Verify the motor parameters.
 Verify the size of the motor/drive/load.
 Verify the state of the mechanism.
 Decrease [Current limitation] CLI.
 Increase the switching frequency.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Drive Overheating] OHF

Probable Cause
Drive temperature too high.

Remedy
Verify the motor load, the drive ventilation, and the ambient temperature. Wait for the drive to cool down
before restarting.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

330 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Process Overload] OLC

Probable Cause
Process overload.

Remedy
 Verify and remove the cause of the overload.
 Verify the parameters of the [Process overload] OLd- function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Motor Overload] OLF

Probable Cause
Triggered by excessive motor current.

Remedy
 Verify the setting of the motor thermal monitoring
 Verify the motor load. Wait for the motor to cool down before restarting
 Verify the setting of the following parameters:
 [Motor Th Current] ITH

 [Motor Thermal Mode] THT

 [Motor Therm Thd] TTD
 [MotorTemp ErrorResp] OLL

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 331

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Single Output Phase Loss] OPF1

Probable Cause
Loss of one phase at drive output.

Remedy
Verify the wiring from the drive to the motor.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Output Phase Loss] OPF2

Probable Cause
 Motor not connected or motor power too low.
 Output contactor opened.
 Instantaneous instability in the motor current.

Remedy
 Verify the wiring from the drive to the motor.
 If an output contactor is being used, set [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL to [No Error Triggered] OAC.
 If the drive is connected to a low-power motor or not connected to a motor: In factory settings mode,
motor phase loss detection is active [Output Phase Loss] OPL = [OPF Error Triggered] YES.
Deactivate motor phase loss detection [Output Phase Loss] OPL = [Function Inactive] nO.
 Verify and optimize the following parameters: [IR compensation] UFr, [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS and
[Rated mot. current] nCr and perform [Autotuning] tUn.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

332 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Supply Mains Overvoltage] OSF

Probable Cause
 Supply mains voltage too high.
 Disturbed supply mains.

Remedy
Verify the supply mains voltage.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[PID Feedback Error] PFMF

Probable Cause
The PID feedback error was out of the allowed range around the set point during the time window.

Remedy
 Check for mechanical breakdown of pipes.
 Check for water leakage.
 Check for open discharge valve.
 Check for fire hydrant opened.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 333

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Program Loading Error] PGLF

Probable Cause
Verify that the error code can be cleared.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Program Running Error] PGrF

Probable Cause
Verify that the error code can be cleared.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

334 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Input phase loss] PHF

Probable Cause
 Drive incorrectly supplied or a tripped fused.
 One phase is unavailable.
 3-phase Drive used on a single-phase supply mains.
 Unbalanced load.

Remedy
 Verify the power connection and the fuses.
 Use a 3-phase supply mains.
 Disable the detected error by [Input phase loss] IPL = [No] nO if single phase supply mains or DC
bus supply is used.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Motor short circuit] SCF1

Probable Cause
Short-circuit or grounding at the drive output.

Remedy
 Verify the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the motor insulation.
 Adjust the switching frequency.
 Connect chokes in series with the motor.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

EAV64387 12/2019 335

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Ground Short Circuit] SCF3

Probable Cause
Significant ground leakage current at the drive output if several motors are connected in parallel.

Remedy
 Verify the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the motor insulation.
 Adjust the switching frequency.
 Connect chokes in series with the motor.
 If you have long cables, verify the setting of [Ground Fault Activation] GrFL.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[IGBT Short Circuit] SCF4

Probable Cause
Power component detected error.
At product power-on, the IGBTs are tested for short circuit. Thereby an error (short circuit or interruption)
has been detected on at least one IGBT. The time to check each transistor is between 1 and 10 μs.

Remedy
Verify the setting of [Output Short Circuit Test] Strt parameter.
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

336 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Motor Short Circuit] SCF5

Probable Cause
Short-circuit at drive output.

Remedy
 Verify the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the motor’s insulation.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Modbus Com Interruption] SLF1

Probable Cause
Communication interruption on the Modbus port.

Remedy
 Verify the communication bus.
 Verify the timeout.
 Refer to the Modbus user manual.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 337

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[HMI Com Interruption] SLF3

Probable Cause
Communication interruption with the Graphic display terminal.
This error is triggered when the command or reference value are given using the Graphic Display Terminal
and if the communication is interrupted during more than 2 seconds.

Remedy
 Verify the Graphic display terminal connection.
 Verify the timeout.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Motor Overspeed] SOF

Probable Cause
 Instability or driving load too high.
 If a downstream contactor is used, the contacts between the motor and the drive have not been closed
before applying a Run command.
 The overspeed threshold (corresponding to 110 % of [Max frequency] TFR) has been reached.

Remedy
 Verify the motor parameter settings.
 Verify the size of the motor/drive/load.
 Verify and close the contacts between the motor and the drive before applying a Run command.
 Verify the consistency between [Max frequency] TFR and [High Speed] HSP. It is recommended to
have at least [Max frequency] TFR ≥ 110% * [High Speed] HSP.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

338 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Motor Stall Error] StF

Probable Cause
The stall monitoring function has detected an error.
The [Motor Stall Error] STF is triggered on the following conditions:
 The output frequency is smaller than the stalling frequency [Stall Frequency] STP3
 The output current is higher than the stalling current [Stall Current] STP2
 For a duration longer than the stalling time S[tall Max Time] STP1.

Remedy
 Search for a mechanical blocking of the motor.
 Search for a possible cause of motor overload.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI2 Thermal Sensor Error] t2CF

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a thermal sensor error on analog input AI2:
 Open circuit, or
 Short circuit.

Remedy
 Verify the sensor and its wiring.
 Replace the sensor.
 Verify the setting of [AI2 Type] AI2T parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 339

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI3 Thermal Sensor Error] t3CF

Probable Cause
The thermal monitoring function has detected an error of the thermal sensor connected to the analog input
AI3:
 Open circuit, or
 Short circuit

Remedy
 Verify the sensor and its wiring.
 Replace the sensor.
 Verify the setting of[ AI3 Type] AI3T parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI4 Thermal Sensor Error] t4CF

Probable Cause
The thermal monitoring function has detected an error of the thermal sensor connected to the analog input
AI4:
 Open circuit, or
 Short circuit

Remedy
 Verify the sensor and its wiring.
 Replace the sensor.
 Verify the setting of [AI4 Type] AI4T parameter

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

340 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI5 Thermal Sensor Error] t5CF

Probable Cause
The thermal monitoring function has detected an error of the thermal sensor connected to the analog input
AI5:
 Open circuit, or
 Short circuit

Remedy
 Verify the sensor and its wiring.
 Replace the sensor.
 Verify the setting of [AI5 Type] AI5T parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI2 Th Level Error] tH2F

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature error on analog input AI2.

Remedy
 Search for a possible cause of overheating.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 341

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI3 Th Level Error] tH3F

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature on analog input AI3.

Remedy
 Search for a possible cause of overheating.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI4 Th Level Error] tH4F

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature on analog input AI4.

Remedy
 Search for a possible cause of overheating.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

342 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI5 Th Level Error] tH5F

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature on analog input AI5.

Remedy
 Search for a possible cause of overheating.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[IGBT Overheating] tJF

Probable Cause
Drive power stage overheating.

Remedy
 Verify the size of the load/motor/drive according to environment conditions.
 Reduce the switching frequency.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 343

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Autotuning Error] tnF

Probable Cause
 Special motor or motor whose power is not suitable for the drive.
 Motor not connected to the drive.
 Motor not stopped.

Remedy
 Verify that the motor/drive are compatible.
 Verify that the motor is connected to the drive during autotuning.
 If an output contactor is being used, verify that it is closed during autotuning.
 Verify that the motor is present and stopped during autotuning.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

[Process Underload] ULF

Probable Cause
Process underload.

Remedy
 Verify and remove the cause of the underload.
 Verify the parameters of the [Process underload] Uld- function

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

344 EAV64387 12/2019

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Supply Mains UnderV] USF

Probable Cause
 Supply mains too low.
 Transient voltage dips.

Remedy
Verify the voltage and the parameters of [Undervoltage handling] USb.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

EAV64387 12/2019 345

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Section 11.3
FAQ

FAQ

FAQ

Introduction
If the display does not light up, verify the supply mains to the drive.
The assignment of the fast stop or freewheel functions help to prevent the drive starting if the
corresponding digital inputs are not switched on. The drive then displays [Freewheel] nSt in freewheel
stop and [Fast stop] FSt in fast stop. This is a normal behavior since these functions are active at zero
so that the drive is stopped if there is a wire break.
Verify that the run command input is activated in accordance with the selected control mode ([2/3-wire
control] tCC and [2-wire type] tCt parameters).
If the reference channel or command channel is assigned to a fieldbus, when the supply mains is
connected, the drive displays [Freewheel] nSt. It remains in stop mode until the fieldbus gives a
command.

Drive lock in blocking state

The drive is locked in a blocking state and displays [Freewheel Stop] nSt, if a Run command such as
Run forward, Run reverse, DC injection is still active during:
 A product reset to the factory settings,
 A manual "Fault Reset" using [Fault Reset Assign] RsF,
 A manual "Fault reset" by applying a product switched off and on again,
 A stop command given by a channel that is not the active channel command (such as Stop key of the
display terminal in 2/3 wires control),
It will be necessary to deactivate all active Run commands prior to authorizing a new Run command.

Option Module Changed or Removed

When an option module is removed or replaced by another, the drive locks in [Incorrect configuration]
CFF error mode at power-on. If the option module has been deliberately changed or removed, the
detected error can be cleared by pressing the OK key twice, which causes the factory settings to be
restored for the parameter groups affected by the option module.

Control Block Changed

When a control block is replaced by a control block configured on a drive with a different rating, the drive
locks in [Incorrect configuration] CFF error mode at power-on. If the control block has been deliberately
changed, the detected error can be cleared by pressing the OK key twice, which causes all the factory
settings to be restored.

346 EAV64387 12/2019

 ATV610_Programming_Manual_EN_EAV64387_05

www.schneider-electric.com/contact 12/2019